SWIFT GROUP OWNER'S HANDBOOK

SWIFT GROUP

OWNER’S

HANDBOOK

COACHBUILT MOTORHOMES

Issued September 2022

Part No. 1446829

Paint Protection Upholstery and Carpet Protection

The only Swift Partner for Paint

and Upholstery Protection

The only

one with the

Lifetime

Guarantee

Tel 01622 815679

Email [email protected]

MADE IN UK

3 41 2

HOW DOES IT WORK?

You will also receive a complimentary After Care pack including the fabulous Waterless Wash, plus a range of other professional cleaning products.

www.jewelultra.com

1. EXTERIOR

• Nano-Ceramic Technology

• Fade Resistant

• Never Polish Again!

2. INTERIOR

• Easy to Clean

• Stain Resistant

• Lifetime Guarantee

If your paintwork was

magniﬁed it would

reveal small pores in

the surface.

Road trafﬁc dirt

gathers in the pores

and attacks

paintwork.

Your ﬁrst Paint Protection

application cleanses and

ﬁlls pores in the vehicles

paintwork leaving a smooth

ﬁnish that cannot be

penetrated.

Your second application

bonds with the ﬁrst to create

a hard protective skin. It

leaves a high lustre ﬁnish that

rain and dirt cannot penetrate.

Jewelultra Ltd. Diamondbrite House, Ewell Lane,

West Farleigh, MAIDSTONE. ME15 ONG.

From the Makers of Diamondbrite

Diamondbrite Leisure

The ultimate Paint and Upholstery Protection

for your Swift Motorhome

Diamondbrite Leisure is a two-step protection system for

your Swift Motorhome with a Lifetime Guarantee*

*Lifetime Guarantee applies for the length of time that the purchaser owns the vehicle and is non-transferable.

INTRODUCTION

Dear owner

Thank you for deciding to buy one of our new

motorhomes.

We are sure you will enjoy many happy hours in

it and we hope the information and hints in

this handbook will heighten your enjoyment.

The handbook has been designed to give you a

general guide to the care, use and maintenance

of your motorhome. Whether you are a new or

an experienced motorhomer the hints will help

to protect your investment.

The information contained will answer most of

your queries, but if there are any aspects which

are not covered please consult your appointed

dealer. We would suggest you make a note of

your dealers name and contact information

below.

Throughout the season, speciﬁcations and

equipment details contained within this

handbook may change. Please refer to our

online handbooks (www.swiftgroup.co.uk) for

the most up-to-date version of your handbook.

Customers should note that this handbook,

contains general information for the use and

care of your product and the technical handbook

contains the technical information, weights and

dimensions of all products.

Dealer Name:

.........................................

Telephone Number:

.........................................

E-mail:

.........................................

VIN:

.........................................

Sales Tel:

.........................................

Service Centre Tel:

.........................................

Parts Tel:

.........................................

First Service Due:

.........................................

CONTENTS

Contents

1. Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2. Motorhome Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3. Preparing for the road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

4. En Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

5. Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

6. Arrival at the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

7. Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

8. Electrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

9. Fitted Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

10. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

11. Useful Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

WARRANTY INFORMATION

1. Warranty

1.1 Motorhome Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.2 Change of ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.3 My Swift Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.4 What to do if you require assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.5 Annual service/ inspection record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

1.6 Annual service / inspection record stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1.7 Supplier contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

WARRANTY INFORMATION

1.1 Motorhome Warranty

All the illustrations and descriptive matter in

this handbook are intended to give a general

idea of the motorhome. Changing market and

supply situations and our policy of continuous

product development may prevent us from

maintaining the exact speciﬁcations detailed in

this handbook. We therefore reserve the right to

alter speciﬁcations as materials and conditions

demand.

Dealers are not agents of Swift Group Limited

(“Swift”) and have absolutely no authority to

bind the manufacturer by any express or implied

undertaking or representation.

Your Coach-built motorhome has four

warranties:

Base Vehicle Warranty – provided by Ford or

Fiat

Your vehicle is a coach-built motorhome

which utilises a Ford or Fiat base vehicle.

Swift takes a ﬂat bed chassis supplied by Ford

or Fiat and adds the coach-built habitation

part of the motorhome. Ford or Fiat provide a

manufacturer’s warranty for the base vehicle

as supplied to Swift by them. For any issues

with the base vehicle warranty please contact

your local Ford or Fiat dealer. This Motorhome

Warranty does not cover any parts of your

motorhome that are covered by the Ford or Fiat

manufacturer’s warranty. Your base vehicle

warranty is subject to the terms and conditions

contained in the Ford or Fiat handbook supplied

with the base vehicle and the vehicle must be

serviced in accordance with Ford’s or Fiat’s

requirements.

SuperSure Warranty – provided by Swift

For all parts or ﬁttings of your coach-built

motorhome other than the habitation body

shell and the Ford or Fiat base vehicle, Swift

will repair (or at it’s option, replace) any

defective parts or ﬁttings for 3 years from the

date of purchase (or hire purchase) subject to

conditions, terms and exclusions below.

Body Shell Warranty – provided by Swift

Swift will repair (or at its option, replace) any

defects with the habitation body shell for 6 years

from the date of purchase (or hire purchase),

subject to the conditions, terms and exclusions

below.

Extended Body Shell Warranty – provided by

Swift

For the ﬁrst owner, Swift will repair (or at its

option, replace) any defects with the habitation

body shell for 10 years from the date of purchase

(or hire purchase), subject to the conditions,

terms and exclusions below. The SuperSure

Warranty, the Body Shell warranty and/or the

Extended Body Shell Warranty provided by Swift

do not cover any parts of the motorhome that

are covered by the Ford or Fiat warranty.

Conditions for the SuperSure, Body Shell and

Extended Body Shell Warranties

1. You must ensure that the habitation part of

your coach-built motorhome has an Annual

Service (see clause 2 below) within 90 days

before or 60 days after each anniversary

of the original date of purchase. In order to

preserve your SuperSure Warranty the third

Annual Service must, however, be carried

out before the expiry of the 36 month period

from the original date of purchase. In order

to preserve your Body Shell Warranty, the

sixth Annual Service must be carried out

before the expiry of the 72 month period

from the original date of purchase. In order

to preserve your Extended Body Shell

Warranty, the tenth Annual Service must

be carried out before the expiry of the 120

month period from the original date of

purchase. If you have not performed an

Annual Service then Swift will not be obliged

to perform any work under the applicable

warranty. Original VAT invoices must be

retained as proof that Annual Service have

been carried out.

2. The Annual Service on the body shell

and habitation area must be carried out

in accordance with the requirements in

this handbook. You will be responsible for

any charges made for an Annual Service.

If the Annual Service is performed by an

authorised Swift Group Service Centre then

Swift warrants that the Annual Service has

been performed correctly. If the Annual

Service is performed by an unauthorised

repairer or service centre then if the

Annual Service has not been performed in

accordance with the requirements in this

handbook and/or work has been performed

on your motorhome that is defective or

faulty, then Swift will not be obliged to

perform any work under this Warranty

(insofar as it relates to defective or faulty

work or defective Annual Service).

3. All new motorhomes must be registered with

Swift within 6 weeks of purchase as new.

4. The beneﬁt of the SuperSure and Body Shell

Warranties may be transferred to a new

owner if the motorhome is re-sold, provided

that the motorhome has been serviced in

accordance with the requirements of this

handbook, and details of the change of

ownership have been supplied to Swift using

the change of ownership form set out in this

handbook as soon as reasonably practicable

after the change.

5. The beneﬁt of the Extended Body Shell

Warranty is non transferable to new owners

and applies only to the original registered

keeper of the vehicle.

6. If any repairs are identiﬁed as being

necessary to the body shell or habitation

areas during an Annual Service or otherwise,

Swift will only pay for Warranty work

performed by an authorised Swift Group

Service Centre. The motorhome must be

made available to an authorised Swift Group

Service Centre within 6 weeks of the date

the repair need was identiﬁed for the work

to be carried out. The cost of transporting,

towing or moving the motorhome by any

means to or from the place of repair is the

responsibility of the owner.

7. The SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended

Body Shell Warranties only apply to

motorhomes purchased and used primarily

within the UK. Please refer to the Fiat

handbook for us.

Terms

8. The Body Shell Warranty and Extended

Body Shell Warranty covers any defect with

the panels and seams of the coachbuilt

habitation part of the motorhome. This

includes body leaks, delamination of

panels or ﬂoor, water ingress through any

permanently sealed seam joints. NB: The

Extended Body Shell Warranty is non

transferable and only applies to the original

registered owner.

9. In the ﬁrst 12 months the SuperSure

Warranty will cover any defect other than

those speciﬁed in the Exclusions below.

10. In the years 2 and 3 the SuperSure Warranty

will only cover any defect with the following

components:

• Electrical System: PSU, battery charger,

Smart Command and interior lighting units

(excluding bulbs).

• Water system: water heater, fresh water tank,

water pump, water gauges, taps and shower

head.

• Cooker: the cooker unit including grill, oven,

burners, igniter and ﬂame failure device.

• Refrigerator: gas igniter, ﬂame failure device,

door seal condenser, gas control valve, 12V

and 230V heater elements, gas thermostat,

230V thermostat and 230V temperature

control switch.

• Cassette toilet: the casstte toilet (excluding

seals, valves and glands)

• Heating system: thermostat, motor, switches,

control unit, gas heater, ﬂame failure device

and igniter (excluding ducting and ﬁttings)

• Windows: the functionality of the opening and

closing sytem (stays, handles and catches)

and a warranty against the cracking of the

acrylic. Excludes fading.

• Upholstery: zips, seams and colour fastness.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

In years 2 and 3, any defect speciﬁed in the

Exclusions will not be covered.

11. Swift shall not be liable under the SuperSure,

Body Shell and Extended Body Shell

Warranties for any defect related to or

arising from the following:

• The failure of a component for reasons of fair

wear and tear;

• Damage resulting from freezing, ﬁre,

overheating or accidents (whether caused by

the user or a third party);

• Misuse of any component;

• Normal deterioration, corrosion, intrusion of

foreign or harmful bodies, lack of servicing

or negligence of any person other than Swift

which causes stoppage of or impairment to the

function of any component of the motorhome;

• Replacement of parts which have reached the

end of their eﬀective working life because of

age and/or usage; Cleaning or adjustment of

any assemblies;

• Cosmetic ﬁnishes to kitchen sinks, cooker

tops, vanity units, shower trays; and/or

• Routine maintenance items which are part of

the annual service including lubricants, rubber

gas hose, the cleaning of the heater and

fridge ﬂues, the replacement of gas jets, the

resealing and/or replacement of shower room

sealant, and the adjustment and lubrication

of locks.

• Damage caused by any abrasive cleaners

12. In addition to the exclusions above, in years

2 and 3 of the SuperSure Warranty Period,

Swift Group Limited shall not be liable under

this Warranty for any defects related to:

• Any audio equipment

• Any microwave

• Wall and Roof GRP sheeting material: after 24

months from date of purchase

• Plastoform window system (Edge, Ascari,

Voyager, Escape): after 24 months from date

of purchase

• Factory ﬁtted leisure battery: after 12 months

from date of purchase

• Factory ﬁtted Thule awning (where ﬁtted):

after 24 months from date of purchase

13. Swift shall also not be liable under the

SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended Body

Shell Warranties if the Motorhome has been

neglected, misused, modiﬁed or used for

hire or reward or if the identiﬁcation marks

(chassis/VIN numbers) have been removed

or defaced. The motorhome will be deemed

to have been neglected if it has not been

serviced and maintained as stated in this

handbook or any repairs being identiﬁed as

necessary at an Annual Service or by a Swift

Group Service Centre have not been carried

out in a reasonable time.

You have legal rights under UK law governing

the sale of consumer goods. This Warranty

does not aﬀect your legal rights.

The name and address of the Warranty provider

is:

Swift Group Limited, Dunswell Road,

Cottingham, East Yorkshire, HU16 4JX

To make a claim under this Warranty, contact

the Swift Group Dealer which supplied your

motorhome. Alternatively, details of your

nearest authorised Swift Group Service Centre

can be found on our website, however please

note that only your supplying dealer is obliged to

carry out warranty work. Alternatively you can

contact the Swift Group via the Swift Customer

Portal “My Swift Life”, please visit our website to

WARRANTY INFORMATION

1.2 Change of ownership

You can transfer the remainder of any 3 year

‘Supersure’ warranty’ and the 6 year ‘Body Shell’

warranty, details of how to do this can be found

at the rear of this handbook. The ‘Extended 10

Year Body Shell Warranty’ is non transferable.

1.3 My Swift Life

You have access to an online system which is

for all Swift models. Please register via our

website www.swiftgroup.co.uk

Once registered please log in and create

your own proﬁle. Should you have issues

with accessing My Swift Life, please contact

our Customer Experience Team, via email:

enquiries@swiftleisure.co.uk

iNote: You will need to inform Ford or Fiat

UK of any change of ownership relating to the

base vehicle warranty.

1.4 What to do if you require

assistance

Should you have an enquiry or require

assistance with a problem, we hope that this

guide will be of assistance to you.

Please follow these steps:

1. Check the Owners Handbook, paying

particular attention to the fault ﬁnding advice

at the back of the book.

2. Contact your supplying dealer for assistance.

If you need to contact the Swift Group, please

be aware of the following:

1. The best way to contact the Swift Customer

Experience team is via the My Swift Life

portal, if you are contacting us via, email or

phone please quote your name, postcode

and VIN (Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number).

This can be found at the bottom of the front

windscreen, on the plate on the front cross

member within the engine compartment

(Fiat) or on the inside of the door pillar

(Ford).

The Swift manufacturers plate also contains

the VIN and is situated on the inside of the

passenger door pillar.

2. In most instances, the Customer Experience

Team will involve your dealer in resolving

the issue you are experiencing and will be in

touch within 5 working days..

3. Please be aware that the Swift Group cannot

send parts direct from the factory. In all

cases, without exception, your dealer must

place the order for you and if your dealer

quotes your chassis number, this will enable

you to view your order in the My Swift Life

portal.

1.5 Annual service/ inspection record

In order to comply with the warranty, you must

have the habitation area of your motorhome

inspected and serviced at least once per year.

iNote: The base vehicle servicing

requirements are found in the Ford or Fiat

handbooks.

We highly recommend that you have your

Motorhome serviced by a Swift Group Approved

Service Centre who have direct access to our

online Customer Service system, Connect. This

system provides them with the ability to order

approved parts and ensure that any product

upgrades which may be available for your

Motorhome can be oﬀered to you and carried

out as part of the service. In the unfortunate

event that an issue requires attention under

warranty then Swift Group Approved Service

Centres are able to submit a warranty claim to

the Swift Group for processing, and deal with

the issue for you from start to ﬁnish. All of our

Swift Group Approved Service Centres are

provided with up to date technical information

and have access to current repair methods

giving you peace of mind that any defect has

been repaired eﬀectively.

It is important that the Owner’s Handbook

is stamped on the appropriate page by the

authorised Swift Group Service Centre. Failure

to do this will invalidate the warranty and

the transfer of the warranty on the change of

ownership.

The inspection should take approximately two

to four hours and will cover the areas dealt

with in the annual service check list. Any areas

requiring service and/or maintenance will be

highlighted by your dealer and we recommend

that you authorise any necessary work to be

carried out.

iNote: It is essential, to validate the

warranty, that an annual inspection be carried

out by an authorised Swift Group Service

Centre covering the items listed.

1. Damp and lamination test

2. Chassis and chassis to body security

3. Motorhome step

4. Road lights, wiring and reﬂectors

5. Internal lights and 12V DC system

6. Water heater - gas and 230V AC (if ﬁtted)

7. Hob, grill and oven

8. Refrigerator 230V AC, 12V DC and gas

9. Gas system

10. Water pump, taps and water system

11. Mains 230V AC system

12. Windows and ﬁttings

13. Smoke alarm and battery

14. Carbon Monoxide detector and Battery

15. Roof lights

16. Furniture hinges/stays etc

17. Exterior locks and hinges

18. All internal vents

19. Seals

20. Blinds and ﬂy screens (if ﬁtted)

21. Blown air heating and gas ﬁre systems

22. Drop down bed operation

WARRANTY INFORMATION

1.6 Annual service / inspection

record stamps

Motorhome model:

Year:

Chassis VIN:

1st service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

2nd service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

3rd service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

4th service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

5th service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

6th service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

7th service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

8th service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

9th service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

10th service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

11th service

DATE:

DEALER’S STAMP

We certify that an annual service has been

carried out in accordance with the handbook.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

1.7 Supplier contacts

A number of Swift Group suppliers manage their own Technical and Warranty related queries. Where

a customer has a question relating to a product manufactured by a company listed below, we would

advise that the ﬁrst contact should be directly with them.

Sargent Electrical Services

Unit 39, Tokenspire Business Park,Beverley,

East Yorkshire, HU17 0TB

Phone: 01482 678981

Fax: 01482 678987

E-mail: suppor[email protected]

https://sargentltd.co.uk

AL-KO Kober Limited

South Warwickshire Business Park

Kineton Road, Southam,

Warwickshire, CV47 0AL

Fax: 01926 818562

Email: [email protected]

http://www.al-ko.co.uk

Truma UK Ltd.

Park lane, Dove Valley Park,

South Derbyshire, DE65 5BG

Phone: 01283 586020

Fax: 01283 586029

technical@trumauk.com

https://www.truma.com/uk/en/home

Thetford Ltd.

Unit 6, Brookﬁelds Way, Manvers,

Dearne Valley, Rotherham,

South Yorkshire, S63 5DL

Phone - 0844 997 1960

Fax - 0844 997 1961

Email - [email protected]

https://www.thetford-europe.com

Alde International (UK) Ltd

Huxley Close, Park Farm South,

Wellingborough, Northants, NN8 6AB

Phone: 01933 677765

Fax: 01933 674975

Email: [email protected]

https://www.alde.co.uk/

Dometic (UK) Ltd

Dometic House, The Brewery,

Blandford St Mary, Dorset, DT11 9LS

Phone: 0844 626 0133

Email: technical@dometic.co.uk

https://www.dometic.com/en-gb/uk

MOTORHOME CODE

2. Motorhome Code

2.1 Code of conduct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.2 Wild camping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.3 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.4 The Country Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.5 Coastal code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.6 Handbooks (chassis & converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.1 Code of conduct

Camp sites

Arrivals

Report to reception immediately on arrival.

Vehicle Movement

Keep to roadways unless otherwise directed.

Adhere to speed limits. Note that these are

generally 10 mph. (Remember that the stopping

distance on grass is considerably greater than

on tarmac.)

Only a person in possession of a current driving

licence may drive on the site.

Park correctly as advised on your pitch. Where

possible leave 20 feet of free space around your

vehicle.

Use of Site Appliances

Use the electrical mains hook-up in the correct

manner and with caution. Ensure that all fresh

water taps/connections are turned oﬀ after

use. Have care and consideration when using

all facilities (toilets and showers etc) and

leave clean and tidy. Young children should be

supervised.

Waste Disposal

If the vehicle is not ﬁtted with a waste water

tank, a suitable receptacle should be placed

below all waste water outlet pipes. Do not let

these containers overﬂow. Dispose of all waste

water where instructed. Empty eﬄuent from

chemical toilets where instructed.

To avoid possible damage to sewage puriﬁcation

works, only approved chemical ﬂuids must be

used. Under no circumstances should coal tar,

phenol or caustic-based ﬂuids be used.

Disposable nappies and similar bulky items

must not be put into chemical closet emptying

points but should be wrapped in a polythene bag

and placed in the container provided. Place all

litter in containers marked for the purpose.

Noise

Do not make excessive noise.

Children should be restrained from making

excessive noise.

Flying kites and model aircraft/drones and the

use of items like catapults or air-guns, as well as

ball games, should not be permitted among, or

close to other vehicles.

Musical instruments, record players, radios

and televisions should not be used to the

inconvenience of other people on the site.

Open and close doors quietly.

Power generators must be adequately silenced

and used with consideration.

Dogs and other Pets

All dogs and other pets should be kept under

control. Unless permission has been granted,

no animal should be allowed loose on the site

and leads must not exceed 10ft.

No animals should be allowed in the shower/

toilet blocks.

Do not let dogs foul the site.

Fire Precautions

Adhere to and take note of ﬁre precautions

noting the whereabouts of the ﬁre points.

WARNING: Provide one dry powder ﬁre

extinguisher of an approved type or complying

with EN3-7 or ISO 7165, of at least 1kg

capacity, by the main exterior door and a ﬁre

blanket next to the cooker. Familiarise yourself

with the operating instructions on your ﬁre

extinguisher and the local ﬁre precaution

arrangements.

When using a dry powder extinguisher it is

suggested that the motorhome be evacuated

until the powder has settled, to avoid inhalation.

MOTORHOME CODE

Unless permission has been granted, barbecues

should not be used. If permission is given,

consideration should be given to the annoyance

that can be caused to other users of the site.

Open ﬁres are not allowed.

Awnings and Tents

Awnings and tents should only be used when

permission has been obtained. When on grass

and staying for more than a few days, the ground

sheet and/or side ﬂaps of awnings should be

periodically raised in order to avoid damage to

the ground.

Departure

Leave the pitch clean and tidy.

On leaving, check out with reception paying the

required fees.

2.2 Wild camping

Camping away from licensed sites, without the

permission from the land owner or his agents, is

not allowed in the United Kingdom.

When permission has been granted, all aspects

of this Code should be adhered to.

On no account should:

• Litter be disposed of other than in the

receptacles provided.

• Water be allowed to escape from the vehicle.

• Chemical toilets be emptied except into the

disposal places agreed with the land owner.

• Washing or similar be hung outside the

vehicle.

Parking

Motorhomes should only be parked in approved

places.

When using the facilities of a motorhome, care

and consideration should be given to those

around them.

Driving

Before moving oﬀ, elevated rooﬂights and

aerials should be lowered and correctly secured,

and top hinged windows closed. Likewise all

doors and access lockers for gas containers and

chemical toilets must be properly secured.

Exterior steps should be properly retracted

and secured. When the vehicle is in motion it is

compulsory for all front seat passengers and

rear seat passengers to wear seat belts, where

ﬁtted.

When using a motorhome on either the public

highway or private roads the Highway Code

should be complied with and full consideration

given to other road users. In the event of a

motorhome travelling slowly the driver of the

motorhome should, where possible, pull over in

order to let other traﬃc pass.

WARNING: When refuelling or on a ferry

ensure the gas system is fully isolated at

source.

2.3 Environment

Care and consideration should be taken to

protect the environment. Observe the Country

and Coastal Codes.

2.4 The Country Code

Enjoy the countryside but respect its life and

work.

More people than ever before are exploring

the countryside, interested in farming, plant

life, bird watching or just observing the general

wildlife. Whatever your interest, there is a lot to

learn, but please observe the following code:

1. Guard against all risk of ﬁres. Hay and

heathland catch alight easily and once

ablaze are very diﬃcult to put out.

Remember: ﬁre spreads quickly.

2. Fasten all gates.

3. Keep your dog under proper control.

4. Keep to the paths across farm land.

5. Avoid damaging fences, hedges and walls.

6. Leave no litter.

7. Safeguard water supplies.

8. Protect wildlife, wild plants and trees.

9. Go carefully on country roads.

10. Respect the life of the countryside. The

MOTORHOME CODE

2.5 Coastal code

As our coastlines are increasingly used for

recreation and education, the following

suggestions are made to enable us to enjoy our

inheritance and preserve it for posterity.

Disturbance may mean DEATH.

Do not trample about, or move rocks

unnecessarily.

Do not frighten seals or seabirds.

Do not spill detergents, solvents or fuel from

boats as these can kill marine life.

When sailing, moderate your speed - the wash

from a fast boat can destroy banks and nests.

Live molluscs and crustaceans need not be

collected as souvenirs - dead shells can usually

be found.

Shellﬁsh can take years to grow and ﬁnes can be

imposed for not observing national regulations.

Do not pull up seaweeds unnecessarily. Make

your visit instructive - not destructive.

Look at material - don’t remove it. Take notes

and photographs, not specimens.

Observe by-laws and be considerate to others.

National Trust property and Country Parks have

regulations to protect the wildlife. Follow these

and the Country and Coastal Codes.

2.6 Handbooks (chassis & converter)

Before using a motorhome all aspects of

the handbooks, produced by the chassis

manufacturer and the converter, must be read

and adhered to.

The separate chassis manufacturer handbook

refers to your motorhome chassis and base

vehicle including care and maintenance.

Fiat handbook

https://bit.ly/3OUP7vT

Ford handbook

https://bit.ly/3JpAkrN

If you are unable to view the documents on line,

please contact the supplier, your dealer or Swift

for an electronic or paper copy.

PREPARING FOR THE ROAD

3. Preparing for the road

3.1 Before moving oﬀ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

3.2 Motorhome terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

3.3 Loading of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.4 Large storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3.5 Roof loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3.6 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3.7 Tyre Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3.8 Dedicated travelling passenger seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3.9 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3.10 ISOFix Child Seat Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.11 Three point seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.12 Driving licence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3.13 Advice on towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3.14 European Touring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

PREPARING FOR THE ROAD

3.1 Before moving oﬀ

Check:

• Gas cylinders are correctly positioned,

secured and turned oﬀ unless using en-route

• Heating. all gas operated appliances have

been isolated, except the en-route heating

system if ﬁtted.

• Loose articles including bed and luton ladders

are stowed securely. Do not stow tins, bottles

or heavy items in overhead lockers.

• All lockers and cupboard doors are closed and

secured.

• Tables are stored or locked in their transit

position.

• Fridge is on 12V operation and door lock s set.

• 230V mains input socket ﬂap is securely

closed.

• All drain valves are closed

• Tyre pressures and wheel nuts.

• Rear corner steadies (if ﬁtted) are raised.

• Exterior roof rack ladder is raised and secured.

• All windows/doors/rooﬂights are closed and

secured.

• TV aerial is lowered and locked into position

(where ﬁtted).

• Exterior step (where ﬁtted) is retracted /

folded in.

• Ensure exterior service locker is closed and

locked (where ﬁtted).

• Drop down bed is in upper stowed position.

Special attention must be taken to ensure all top

hinged windows as well as the Luton windows,

Skyviews and rooﬂights are closed when in

transit. All units should be fully closed and

latched to prevent damage. The motorhome

exterior door should also be locked.

WARNING: Large and/or voluminous items

should be stored securely before travelling.

WARNING: Vehicles over 3m high have a

maximum vehicle height label aﬃxed to the

drivers sunblind. When planning your route

take your vehicle height into consideration.

Central locking (if ﬁtted)

Central locking features vary between type

of base vehicle (Fiat or Ford), base vehicle

manufacturer changes and updates, and in

some cases adjustable settings on the base

vehicle dashboard. In addition, the presence of

a central locking link from the base vehicle to

the habitation door is dependent on range and

model.

The base vehicle central locking typically will

not activate unless the cab doors are closed, and

depending on base vehicle the habitation door

may also need to be closed. Care is needed to

understand the central locking features on your

motorhome, to prevent being locked out, for

instance:

It is possible that after un-locking doors using

the supplied keyfob, if no door is opened, or if

only the habitation door is opened, the central

locking may automatically re-lock after a short

period of time.

If a habitation door is open when central locking

is activated, the habitation door lock when that

door is closed may engage and become locked.

To open the habitation door from inside the

motorhome when locked, pull the internal door

handle twice.

3.2 Motorhome terms

Mass in Running Order:

The mass of the motorhome equipped to

the motorhome manufacturers standard

speciﬁcation, as stated by the manufacturer.

The MRO comprises the ex-works weight of

the motorhome, including the driver, 90%

fuel capacity, 1 x LPG gas cylinder @10kg and

standard ﬁxtures & ﬁttings in compliance with

European Regulation No. 1230/2012 (Masses

& Dimensions)

iNote: The mass of the motorhome in

running order contains provision for the

masses of liquids, gas etc. (see Mass in

Running Order in the Technical Section).

Part of this provision can also be utilised as

additional payload, if for example, you wish to

travel with no gas cylinders.

iNote: If you travel with water in the fresh

water tank or waste tank, the payload will be

reduced accordingly

iNote: Quoted MRO is subject to tolerance,

due to weight variation of materials used in

Motorhome construction.

Maximum User Payload:

The maximum allowable weight to be put into

the motorhome whilst it is being driven. This is

made up of 4 sections:

Personal eﬀects, conventional load, optional

equipment and essential habitation equipment.

The Maximum User Payload is the diﬀerence

between the Maximum Technically Permissible

Laden Mass and the Mass in Running Order.

Personal Eﬀects:

Those items which a user can choose to carry

in a motorhome and which are not included as

Essential Habitation Equipment or Optional

equipment.

Conventional Load:

A mass allowance for each designated

passenger seat.

Optional Equipment:

Items made available by the manufacturer over

and above the standard speciﬁcation of the

motorhome.

Essential Habitation:

A mass allowance for liquids in systems not

accounted for within the MRO.

Maximum Technically Permissible Laden

Mass:

The maximum weight for which the motorhome

is designed for normal use when being driven on

a road, laden.

This mass takes into account speciﬁc operating

conditions including factors such as the strength

of materials, loading capacity of tyres etc.

WARNING: Under no circumstances should

the axle loadings or the Maximum Technically

Permissible Laden Mass of the motorhome be

exceeded.

Nose weight of Towed Trailers:

The static mass of the trailer towing device on

the rear of the towing vehicle.

Notes:

When measuring the noseweight it is important

that the trailer is loaded.

The trailer is intended to be towed slightly

nose heavy. The nose weight can be adjusted

by distribution of the load. The nose weight

should be approximately 7% of the actual laden

weight (but not greater than the hitch capacity)

and at the same time suit the motorhome

requirements.

See ‘Advice on Towing’

3.3 Loading of vehicle

WARNING: The driver is responsible for

arranging the loads so that they comply with

the technical weight limits of the speciﬁc

motorhome model.

Correct weight distribution is an important

factor in ensuring your vehicle is well balanced

and easy to drive. It is therefore necessary to

load your motorhome carefully making sure all

heavy articles are evenly distributed and are

preferably placed in the lower lockers or bed

boxes.

WARNING: Do not travel with televisions

or microwaves in overhead lockers unless

the appliance was supplied ﬁtted to your

motorhome by the manufacturer.

Although it is essential to ensure that the total

weight of your motorhome does not exceed the

stipulated Maximum Technically Permissible

Laden Mass, (MTPLM), it is important to

remember that the front and rear axles also have

individual maximum weights which must not be

exceeded.

PREPARING FOR THE ROAD

See your Technical Handbook for MTPLM and

maximum axle loads.

iNote: To ensure adequate road holding the

load on the front axle, under all conditions,

must not be less than 40% or more than 70%

of the total weight.

Ensure you distribute the payload equally on

each side of the vehicle to avoid an imbalance.

These weights, together with the MTPLM, can

be found on the Statutory plate adhered to the

bulkhead behind the right hand cab seat.

iNote: Please take care to ensure you

have allowed for the masses of all the items

you intend to carry in your motorhome e.g.

passengers, optional equipment, essential

habitational equipment and personal eﬀects

such as clothing, food, pets, bicycles,

sailboards, sports equipment etc.

3.4 Large storage areas

The large storage areas provided in some

motorhome layouts are designed solely for

the purpose of carrying personal possessions,

these areas must not be used;

• as a habitation area (eg living, sleeping or

cooking).

• to carry passengers, animals or livestock.

• for the installation (or use) of any LPG gas

operated appliances, (unless supplied ﬁtted

by the manufacturer).

• for carrying LPG gas bottle cylinders.

• to carry any ﬂammable liquids, unless

properly stored, sealed and secured.

• for the operation of an electrical generator.

• in such a way that the load exceeds the MTPLM

or maximum axle loads.

Care must be taken to ensure that exterior doors

are closed, locked and that all possessions are

properly stored and secured before setting oﬀ

on any journey.

3.5 Roof loading

Some motorhome roofs can be ﬁtted with a roof

rack (optional).

A maximum load of 50kgs can be evenly

distributed on the roof rack system.

This ﬁgure MUST NOT be exceeded.

iNote: When loading the roof rack, make

sure the load is spread evenly and do not allow

sharp objects to come into contact with the

roof surface.

iNote: Ensure items loaded on the roof rack

do not act as a sail (i.e. deck chairs).

WARNING: Do not apply excessive load to

the rear suspension of your motorhome

or allow the vehicle to reverse with the roof

rack access ladder in the down position,

touching the ground. This may cause excessive

strain on the ladder ﬁxing points.

The ﬂat roof areas, up to the over cab section,

are capable of withstanding an average person’s

weight (13 stone or 82.5kg).

iNote: Do not walk on the formed over cab

roof section.

WARNING: The roof may become

slippery in adverse conditions, wipe dry before

attempting to walk on roof section. Extreme

care should be taken to avoid

falling from the vehicle.

WARNING: When walking on the roof, deck

type shoes should be worn – not leather sole.

3.6 Tyres

iNote: If a wheel or tyre ﬁtted to a vehicle is

changed any replacement must be of the same

type of construction and size.

The law requires that the tyres and pressures

must be suitable for the use to which they

are being put. The minimum tread depth

must be 1.6mm throughout a continuous

band comprising the centre three-quarters

of the breadth of the tread and around the

circumference of the tyre.

Please refer to base vehicle manufacturer’s

handbook (Fiat/Ford or AL-KO AMC conversion

handbook) for tyre pressure information.

PREPARING FOR THE ROAD

This may also be displayed in the driver’s or

passenger’s door aperture.

Fiat Based Motorhome Tyre Speciﬁcations

You should note Motorhomes using a Fiat base

vehicle are ﬁtted with “Camper Tyres”. Camper

tyres meet a speciﬁc “CP” (Camping Pneu)

standard for tyres on Motorhomes. The Camper

tyres on a Motorhome (unlike a commercial

van) are designed to carry a signiﬁcantly higher

load for the majority of their life and even when

stationery for greater periods of time unlike

a van which typically loads and unloads. As a

result Camper tyres have stiﬀened side walls to

withstand the increased payloads and pressure

on them, this extra reinforcement also gives

better vehicle stability on the rear with the

heavier rear axle loads typical on a Motorhome.

The tyres are also designed to improve mileage

(wear) and oﬀer better grip oﬀ road.

When replacing your tyres we only recommend

the ﬁtment of CP or Camper Tyres.

3.7 Tyre Pressures

The motorhome tyre pressures noted in the

Fiat/Ford handbook are the pressures stated

by Fiat/Ford for your vehicle and are calculated

in a fully laden condition. If you are not running

fully laden, reduced pressures could be used

but please seek clariﬁcation from the Tyre

manufacturer.

3.8 Dedicated travelling passenger

seating

Seat belts are ﬁtted to all travelling seats.

Travelling seats are designated by the

manufacturer and vary according to the layout

you have purchased. Each seat is homologated

i.e. tested to all relevant safety requirements.

NEVER travel in or attempt to install a seatbelt to

a non-designated seat.

WARNING: Side facing seats are designed

for habitational use only, not for use when the

vehicle is in motion.

Seat belts and legislation

Designated driver and passenger seats are

ﬁtted with seat belts and MUST be worn when

travelling.

Children, aged up to 3 years of age, must wear

an appropriate child restraint suitable for their

age and weight. Children from 3 years of age

and up to 135cm (4’5”) in height, or 12 years of

age, whichever is reached ﬁrst must use a child

car seat or booster seat suitable for their age.

Children over 135cm (4’5”) in height or aged 12

years and over must wear a seat belt.

iNote: It is the legal responsibility of the

driver to ensure children aged up to 14 years

old are suitably restrained. For passengers

aged 14 and over, it is their responsibility (not

the driver) that a seat belt is worn.

Seat belts are ﬁtted for your safety and must be

worn unless a ‘Certiﬁcate of Exemption from

Compulsory Seat Belt Wearing’ is held. This

Certiﬁcate must be produced if asked for by the

Police – seat belt oﬀences can result in a ﬁne.

3.9 Child seats

Choosing/Buying

Go to a reputable retailer such as Halford’s or

John Lewis etc. Most reputable retailers will

have trained child seat advisers on site and

will oﬀer a ﬁtting service. Ask the advisor to ﬁt

various seats to the vehicle. Once a correctly

ﬁtting seat has been installed, satisfy yourself

on its suitability for your child and the vehicle

before buying as it is important to use a correctly

ﬁtting seat in your motorhome.

WARNING: The child seat you use in your

car may not be suitable for mounting on a

motorhome seat.

Choose the right seat for your child’s height and

weight.

PREPARING FOR THE ROAD

Height-based seats

Height-based seats are known as ‘i-Size’ seats.

They must be rear-facing until your child is over

15 months old. Your child can use a forward-

facing child car seat when they’re over 15

months old.

You must check the seat to make sure it’s

suitable for the height of your child.

Only EU-approved height-based child car

seats can be used in the UK. These have a label

showing a capital ‘E’ in a circle and ‘R129’.

Weight-based seats

The seat your child can use (and the way they

must be restrained in it) depends on their

weight.

Only EU-approved weight-based child car

seats can be used in the UK. These have a label

showing a capital ‘E’ in a circle and ‘ECE R44’.

You may be able to choose from more than one

type of seat in the group for your child’s weight.

For more information visit www.gov.uk

Never ﬁt or use a second hand car seat. It could

have been damaged and may not meet modern

standards. The ﬁtting instructions may also be

missing.

Positioning/ Fitting

Dependant upon the child seat type, the most

suitable position for the child seat to be ﬁtted

may be the front passenger seat of the cab

(NOTE airbag advice below) or the window

seat of the forward facing rear seat, advice

should always be taken from the retailer on

the suitability and security of the seat in the

motorhome. The aisle seat is not recommended

unless an ISOFIX point is present (Escape,

Voyager or Kon-Tiki only).

Read and follow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions for ﬁtting the seat.

All Swift Motorhomes are ﬁtted with inertia reel

seat belts, however, the child seat must be tight

in the adult seat. Push all your weight into the

child seat as you tighten the belt.

Keep a copy of the child seat ﬁtting instruction in

the motorhome for easy reference.

Any doubts, ask an advisor to show you how to

correctly install the seat.

Airbag

Never ﬁt a rear-facing child restraint in a seat

with an active airbag in front of it.

Forward-facing child restraints should be

positioned as far back from the airbag as

possible. Check the base vehicle handbook.

WARNING: Extreme Hazard! Never use

a rearward facing child restraint on a seat

protected by an active airbag in front of it.

Death or serious injury to the child can occur.

WARNING: You must switch the passenger

airbag oﬀ when using a rearward facing child

restraint on the front seat.

WARNING: You must switch the passenger

airbag on following the removal of the child

restraint.

WARNING: Do not modify child restraints

in any way.

WARNING: Do not hold a child on your lap

when your vehicle is moving.

WARNING: Do not leave children or pets

unattended in your vehicle. Failure to follow

this instruction could result in personal injury

or death.

WARNING: If your vehicle has been

involved in a crash, have the child restraints

checked.

WARNING: Do not put the shoulder section

of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the

shoulder section of the seatbelt under their

arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this

instruction could reduce the eﬀectiveness of

the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or

death in a crash.

WARNING: Do not use pillows, books or

towels to boost your child’s height. Failure to

follow this instruction could result in personal

injury or death.

WARNING: Always make sure your child is

secured properly in a device that is appropriate

for their height, age and weight. Child

safety restraints must be bought separately

from your vehicle. Failure to follow these

instructions and guidelines may result in an

increased risk of serious injury or death to your

child.

3.10 ISOFix Child Seat Restraint

WARNING: Use a top tether anti-rotation

device when using the ISOFIX system.

Do not use a child restraint with a support leg.

Top tethers must be used.

WARNING: Only child restraints certiﬁed to

ECE-R129 or ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been

tested and approved for use in your motor

home.

The Escape, Voyager and Kon-Tiki models

are ﬁtted with ISOFIX anchor points that

accommodate universally approved ISOFIX

child seats. Top tether anchorage points are

also provided. The seats are not suitable for

child restraints that require a support leg as the

seats are too high above the ﬂoor. Only use child

restraints provided with top tethers.

Kon-Tiki 900 series

The Isoﬁc anchorage points are located on the

forward facing rear seats with 2x ﬁxed positions

provided.

The ISOFIX system comprises two rigid

attachment arms on the child seat that attach

to anchor points on the rear seat frame, located

where the cushion and backrest meet. Positions

are marked on the cushions.

Top tether anchor points are ﬁtted on the

upper seatbelt stanchion and are accessed by

removing an insert on the backrest cushion.

General Seat Installation Method:

1. Place the child seat on the seat cushion.

2. Remove the top tether insert.

3. Route the tether strap to the anchor point and

secure.

4. Push the child seat back ﬁrmly to engage the

ISOFIX lower anchor points.

5. Tighten the tether strap in line with the child

seat manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING: Please consult with the child

seat manufacturer’s instructions for full

installation instructions. If in doubt please

consult the child seat manufacturers technical

support team for further guidance on the

installation.

WARNING: Do not attach the top tether

strap to anything other than the correct top

tether strap anchor point.

WARNING: Make sure that the top tether

strap is not slack or twisted and is properly

located on the anchor point.

WARNING: Make sure the child restraint

rests tightly against the vehicle seat.

Voyager, Escape, Kon-Tiki 700 & 800 Series

ISOFIX anchorage points are provided on the

Aguti rear fold up seats. Top tether anchorage

points are located on the rear of the seat back.

To install a child restraint unfold the rear seat

until the back of the seat is between 10° and 15°.

Fit the base cushions ensuring that Velcro on the

cushion engages on the Velcro on the seat base

frame. Do not ﬁt the seat back cushion.

PREPARING FOR THE ROAD

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for connecting the restraint to the

lower anchorage points and attaching the top

tethers. The top tethers must be routed over the

top of the seat but under the head rest.

WARNING: Please consult with the child

seat manufacturer’s instructions for full

installation instructions. If in doubt please

consult the child seat manufacturers technical

support team for further guidance on the

installation.

WARNING: Do not attach the top tether

strap to anything other than the correct top

tether strap anchor point.

WARNING: Make sure that the top tether

strap is not slack or twisted and is properly

located on the anchor point.

WARNING: Make sure the child restraint

rests tightly against the vehicle seat. You may

need to adjust the seats to properly secure the

child restraint.

PREPARING FOR THE ROAD

Location of child

restraint top tether

anchorage.

Top tether routed

over seat back but

under headrest.

Do not ﬁt back

cushion.

Ensure Velcro® on

cushion engages with

Velcro® on frame.

Location of child

restraint lower

anchorages.

3.11 Three point seat belts

This section refers to the seat belts located in

the habitation area of your motorhome.

Fastening the seat belt:

Insert tongue into buckle; a positive ‘click’

indicates correct assembly.

Releasing the seat belt:

Press the red release button, the tongue will be

ejected from the buckle.

• The belt is designed for use by one person and

must not be put around a child seated on a

person’s lap.

• The belt is suitable for restraining most child

seats and boosters.

• The belt should at all times be adjusted and

used in accordance with the instructions. No

excessive slackness should be present.

• Once installed the diagonal should pass across

the centre of the shoulder and the buckle

should lie just on or below the hip.

Avoid twisting the webbing during use. Webbing

must not be allowed to chafe against sharp

edges.

• Do not make alterations or additions to the

belt.

• Belts that have been cut, frayed, damaged or

stressed through impact should be replaced.

After impact the motorhome anchorage points

should also be checked.

• To clean use warm soapy water only.

• Periodic inspection of the installation will

ensure reliability of the seat belt.

PREPARING FOR THE ROAD

Seating Position

Lateral

Facing

Rearward

Facing

Rearward

Facing

Forward

Facing

Rearward

Facing

0 - 10 kg 0 - 10 kg 0 - 13 kg 9 – 18 kg 9 – 18 kg

Front

Passenger

Size class

No ISOFIX

Fixture

2nd row RH

rear Seat

Size class X E C, D, E A, B, B1 C, D

Fixture X R1 R1, R2, R3 F2, F2X, F3 R2, R3

2nd row LH

rear seat

Size class X E C, D, E A, B, B1 C, D

Fixture X R1 R1, R2, R3 F2, F2X, F3 R2, R3

3rd row RH

rear seat

674, 774 &

874 only

Size class X X X A, B, B1 X

Fixture X X X F2, F2X, F3 X

ESCAPE, VOYAGER AND KON-TIKI 700 & 800 series ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT POSITION INFORMATION

The size class and ﬁxture are deﬁned for both universal and semi-universal child restraint systems.

You can see the identiﬁcation letters on ISOFIX child restraints.

X Seat is not suitable for use with this size class of child restraint system.

PREPARING FOR THE ROAD

3.12 Driving licence

Licences issued to drivers who passed their car

driving test before 1st January 1997 include

categories B+E and C1+E which gives them

entitlement to drive motor vehicles up to 7500kg

MTPLM.

Drivers who passed their test on or after this

date have category B entitlement only, which

restricts the entitlement to motor vehicles with

up to 8 passenger seats and an MTPLM of up

to 3500kg with trailers up to 750kg MTPLM

(4250kg combined) or larger trailers providing

the combination of the trailer and towing vehicle

does not exceed 3500kg and the MTPLM of the

trailer does not exceed the unladen weight of

the towing vehicle.

Drivers who passed their test on or after the

1st January 1997 will need to take an additional

test(s) to gain the B+E and C1+E entitlement.

A number of Swift Group motorhomes have

an MTPLM greater than 3500kg, therefore you

must check you have the correct driving licence

entitlement for the vehicle you drive.

3.13 Advice on towing

The towing capability of each motorhome

diﬀers depending on the speciﬁc chassis and

engine types, (see ‘Towing Capabilities’ in your

speciﬁcation handbook).

This takes account of the maximum front and

rear axle loadings as well as the minimum front

axle loading in two conditions, MRO and MTPLM

condition.

Towing in these, and any other condition

requires sensible loading and distribution of

payloads to ensure the requirements of the

towing capability table are met.

When towing, the demands on both the

vehicle and driver increase. A trailer reduces

manoeuvrability, the ability to climb hills,

acceleration and braking capacity and makes

the vehicle handle and corner diﬀerently.

It will also increase the fuel consumption of

the vehicle.

Always brake in good time. Special care must

be taken when descending gradients. Change

down before going down a steep hill so the

engine can act as a brake. Ensure that the

towing vehicle tyre pressures are correct and

adjusted for full load conditions and that the

trailer tyre pressures are as recommended by

the trailer manufacturer. Regularly check the

operation of trailer brakes and lights.

For maximum stability, when loading the trailer

ensure that the loads are properly secured

during transit. Position loads so that most of

the weight is placed close to the ﬂoor and,

where possible, immediately above or close

to the axle(s). Where the load can be divided

between trailer and tow vehicle, loading more

weight into the vehicle will generally improve

the stability of the combination. After loading

the trailer, check that the nose weight and axle

loads are in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations, also check the rear and front

axle loads on the motorhome. When calculating

the laden weight of the trailer, remember to

include the weight of the trailer PLUS THE

LOAD.

iNote: Towing regulations vary from country

to country. It is very important to ensure

that national regulations governing towing

weights and speed limits are observed (refer

to the relevant national motoring organisation

for information). The stated maximum

permissible towing weights refer to the

EN ROUTE

vehicle’s design limitations and NOT to any

speciﬁc territorial restrictions.

WARNING: The AL-KO extensions

ﬁtted to the Edge vehicles are not suitable

for supporting a tow bar. Any tow bar and

supporting structure ﬁtted must be connected

directly to the Fiat chassis. If a tow bar is

required we recommend that the Al-Ko tow

bar assembly, designed speciﬁcally for these

vehicles, is purchased and ﬁtted by your Swift

motor home dealer.

WARNING: The chassis extensions ﬁtted

to the Voyager vehicles are not suitable

for supporting a tow bar. Any tow bar and

supporting structure ﬁtted must be connected

directly to the Ford chassis. Due to payload

restrictions Swift do not recommend towing

with the Voyager vehicles.

Notes:

1. Do not exceed the motorhome gross vehicle

train weight.

2. Do not exceed the maximum front & rear

axle loads on the motorhome.

3. Ensure the motorhome front axle load is

never less than 40% or more than 70% of the

total weight.

4. Motorhomes with an MTPLM up to 3500kg

which have European Type approval can

only be ﬁtted with a type approved towbar

complying to ECE R55.

5. The limit for towing an un-braked trailer

is 750kg (based on VIN plate not actual

weight), this applies to a towed car.

6. A car dolly with a car with a GVW over

750kg in place is considered as two trailers,

these are legal for use for recovery but

under the Road Traﬃc Regulations Act

1984 the combination is limited to 40 mph

on motorways and dual carriageways

and 20 mph elsewhere. A car dolly is not

legal for transportation (there is a very

speciﬁc diﬀerence between recovery and

transportation. Recovery is deﬁned as the

removal of a broken down vehicle to a place

of safety).

7. The maximum permitted vehicle

combination length is 18.75m, however

any combination must ensure compliance

with the turning circle requirements of

Construction and Use regulations 1986 &

(EU) No. 1230/2012.

3.14 European Touring

Please note there are a number of requirements

placed on a driver when driving on European

roads. Carrying a warning triangle, high

visibility jacket, ﬁrst aid kit and spare bulb is

now compulsory in many EU states but some

EU countries are now introducing further

regulations such as carrying a breathalyser kit

and not being able to use satellite navigation

systems with speed camera warnings.

We would advise customers to check on the

many web-sites available to ensure you are

carrying the correct equipment when touring in

those EU countries.

4. En Route

4.1 Motorhome National Speed Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4.2 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

4.3 Parking sensors (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

4.4 Removal of spare wheel on ALKO conversion (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . 33

4.5 Removal of Fiat spare wheel (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

4.6 Fiat Fix & Go Repair Kit (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

4.7 Inﬂation Procedure (FIAT)(Where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

4.8 Bottle Replacement Procedure (FIAT)(where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

4.9 Tyre Sealant and lnﬂator Kit (FORD)(where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

EN ROUTE

4.1 Motorhome National Speed Limits

The national speed limit for your motorhome

depends on the unladen weight of the vehicle

and whether or not the vehicle is towing a trailer.

The unladen weight of the vehicle is the weight

of the vehicle as delivered from the factory with

the fuel tank empty. It does not include any LPG

cylinders, water in the water tanks, personal

possessions or driver and passengers.

The unladen weight for your vehicle can be

found in the technical data handbook.

National Speed Limits

Vehicle Built-up

areas mph

Single

carriageways

mph

Dual

carriageways

mph

Motorways

mph

Motorhomes with an unladen weight of

3050 kg or less

30 60 70

Motorhomes with an unladen weight

greater than 3050 kg

30 50 60 70

All Motorhomes when towing a trailer

30 50 60 60

The speed limits given are national speed limits

for motorhomes and motor caravans being

used for their intended purpose. Be aware that

if the motorhome is being used to carry goods

for exhibition and sale, used as a workshop

or used for storage then it is classed as goods

vehicle and goods vehicle speed limits will apply

irrespective of the unladen weight.

WARNING: Local speed restrictions that

diﬀer from the above may apply and must be

observed. These local restrictions will be

clearly signed.

EN ROUTE

4.2 Cruise control

The driver of the vehicle should always remain

seated and in control of the vehicle when cruise

control has been engaged. Never leave the

driving seat for any reason when the vehicle is

underway.

4.3 Parking sensors (where ﬁtted)

Parking sensors (and camera based systems)

are ﬁtted to some vehicles. Please use the

information provided. Use the sensors as a

guide only. It is the responsibility of the driver to

ensure it is safe to reverse the vehicle.

4.4 Removal of spare wheel on ALKO

conversion (where ﬁtted)

WARNING: Exercise care when lowering

the wheel and frame due to its weight.

Removal

a. Spare wheel in the stowed position

(Fig. 1).

b. Remove the securing pins (a) from the

supports (b) at each side of the spare wheel

carrier frame (c) (Fig. 2).

c. Lift the wheel carrier frame (c) slightly and

move the frame supports (b) forward and

clear of the carrier frame (Fig. 3).

d. Lower the carrier frame and wheel to the

ground (Fig. 4).

e. Remove the spare wheel.

Replacement

Replacement is a reversal of the removal

procedure. Ensure the securing pins (a) are

correctly located in the frame supports (b).

Fig.1

Fig.2 Fig.3

Fig. 4

EN ROUTE

4.5 Removal of Fiat spare wheel

(where ﬁtted)

a. The ground should be ﬂat and adequately

ﬁrm.

b. Turn the engine oﬀ and engage the

handbrake.

c. Engage ﬁrst gear or reverse.

Removal

a. Wheel restraining device screw (ﬁg 1) – rear

right side of vehicle

b. Use the extension and wrench provided to

operate the wheel restraining device screw

(ﬁg 2).

c. When the wheel is fully lowered (ﬁg 3) and

the restraining device screw can turn no

more, use the wrench to pull the wheel out

d. (ﬁg 4). Loosen the knob and remove the

support to release the wheel (ﬁg 5 & 6).

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

iNote: It is possible that a transit zip tie may

still be in place. If wheel does not drop freely

check for zip tie.

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Replacement

Replacement is a reversal of the removal

procedure.

WARNING: Exercise care when handling

the wheel due to its weight.

EN ROUTE

4.6 Fiat Fix & Go Repair Kit (where

ﬁtted)

CAUTION: Before use please read the user

instructions supplied with your Fix & Go repair

kit.

The Fix & Go automatic quick tyre repair kit is

positioned at the front of the vehicle assenger

compartment and includes Fig. A:

Fig.A

• Bottle A containing sealer and ﬁtted with:

– a transparent ﬁller pipe B;

– a black pressure restoring pipe E;

– sticker C bearing the notice “max. 80 km/h”, to

be placed in a position visible to the driver (on

the instrument panel) after ﬁxing the tyre;

• Instruction brochure (see ﬁg. b), to be used for

prompt and correct use of the quick tyre repair

kit and then to be handed to the personnel

charged with handling the tyre treated with

the tyre repair kit;

• A compressor D complete with pressure

gauge and connectors; a pair of protective

gloves located in the side compartment of the

compressor;

• Adaptors for inﬂating diﬀerent elements

CAUTION: Give the instruction booklet to the

tyre repair workshop personnel.

CAUTION: Punctures on the sides of the tyre

cannot be repaired. Do not use the quick tyre

repair kit if the damage is due to running with

ﬂat tyre.

CAUTION: If the wheel rim has been damaged

(bent so as to cause air to leak), the wheel

cannot be repaired. Do not remove the foreign

body (screws or nails) from the tyre.

iNote: Punctures caused by foreign bodies

can be repaired if the damage does not exceed

4 mm on the tread and on the shoulder of the

tyre.

Fig.B

Important Information:

The sealing ﬂuid of the quick tyre repair kit is

eﬀective at external temperatures of between

-20 °C and +50 °C. The sealant has an expiry

date.

CAUTION: The bottle contains ethylene glycol.

It contains latex that might cause allergic

reactions. It is harmful if swallowed. It is

irritant for the eyes. It may cause sensitisation

if inhaled or on contact. Avoid contact with

eyes, skin and clothes. In the event of contact,

wash immediately with plenty of water. Do

not induce vomiting if swallowed. Rinse your

mouth and drink plenty of water. Call a doctor

immediately. Keep out of the reach of children.

The product must not be used by asthmatics.

Do not breathe in the vapours during insertion

and suction. Call a doctor immediately if

allergic reactions are noted. Store the bottle

in its proper compartment, away from sources

of heat. The sealant has an expiry date on the

base of the bottle. Replace the bottle.

EN ROUTE

4.7 Inﬂation Procedure (FIAT)(Where

ﬁtted)

CAUTION: Wear the protective gloves

provided together with the quick tyre repair kit.

CAUTION: Aﬃx the adhesive label in an easy-

to-see position for the driver as a reminder

that the tyre has been treated with the quick

tyre repair kit. Drive carefully, particularly

on bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not

accelerate or brake suddenly.

CAUTION: If the pressure falls below 3

bars, do not drive any further: the Fix &

Go automatic quick tyre repair kit cannot

guarantee proper hold because the tyre is too

much damaged. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

CAUTION: You must inform the dealership that

the tyre has been repaired using the quick tyre

repair kit. Give the booklet to the personnel

who will be handling the tyre treated with the

repair kit.

CAUTION: If diﬀerent tyres from the ones

supplied with the vehicle are used, it may

not be possible to carry out the repair. If the

tyres are replaced, it is advisable to use those

approved by the manufacturer. Consult a Fiat

Dealership.

• Pull the handbrake. Unscrew the tyre valve

cap, take out the ﬁller hose A (Fig. C) and

tighten the ring nut B on the tyre valve;

• Insert the plug E (Fig. E) in the nearest 12V

power socket and start the engine. Turn the

selector D (Fig. D) anti-clockwise to the repair

position. Activate the kit by pressing the on/

oﬀ switch. Inﬂate the tyre to the pressure

speciﬁed in the “Inﬂation pressure” paragraph,

in the “Technical Data” chapter;

For a more accurate reading, it is advisable to

check the pressure reading on the pressure

gauge F (Fig. D) with the compressor oﬀ and

without moving the centre selector from the

repair position

Fig C

Fig D

• If after 10 minutes it is still impossible to reach

at least 3 bar, release the transparent ﬁller

pipe from the valve and take out the 12 V plug,

then move the vehicle forwards by about 10

metres in order to distribute the sealing ﬂuid

inside the tyre evenly, then repeat the inﬂation

operation;

• If after this operation you still cannot reach at

least 3 bar after 10 minutes, do not resume

driving because the tyre is too damaged and

the quick tyre repair kit cannot guarantee

suitable sealing. Contact a Fiat Dealership;

• If the tyre reaches the pressure speciﬁed

in “Inﬂation pressure” paragraph in the

“Technical Data” section of the Fiat user

manual start driving immediately;

Fig

EN ROUTE

After having driven for about 10 minutes, stop

and recheck the tyre pressure; remember to

apply the handbrake;

If a pressure value of at least 3 bar is detected,

inﬂate to the correct pressure, resume driving

and drive with care to nearest Fiat Dealership.

4.8 Bottle Replacement Procedure

(FIAT)(where ﬁtted)

To replace the bottle, proceeds follows:

Fig. F

Press button A (Fig. F) to release the part;

Fit the new bottle and press until it is

automatically engaged.

CAUTION: Replace the bottle containing the

sealant after the expiry date. Expiry date is

shown on the base of the bottle. Dispose of

the bottle and the sealant properly. Have

the sealing ﬂuid and the bottle disposed

of in compliance with national and local

regulations.

4.9 Tyre Sealant and lnﬂator Kit

(FORD)(where ﬁtted)

What is the tyre sealant and inﬂator kit

The kit consists of an a air compressor to

re-inﬂate the tyre and a canister of sealing

compound that eﬀectively seals most

punctures. This kit provides a temporary tyre

repair allowing you to drive your vehicle up to

200km (120 mi) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h

(50 mph) to reach a tyre service location.

Tyre sealant and inﬂator kit precautions

WARNING: Depending on the type and

extent of tyre damage, some tyres can only

be partially sealed or not sealed at all. Loss

of tyre pressure can aﬀect vehicle handling,

leading to loss of vehicle control.

WARNING: Do not use the kit on a

previously damaged tyre. For example, when

it has been driven under-inﬂated. This when it

could has cause been loss of vehicle control,

personal injury or even death.

Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than

6mm (0.24 in) or damage to the tyre’s sidewall.

Only punctures located within the tyre tread can

be sealed with the kit.

Only use the kit supplied with your vehicle.

The temporary mobility kit contains enough

sealant compound in the canister for one tyre

repair only.

After using the sealant, an authorised dealer

needs to replace the tyre pressure monitoring

system sensor and valve stem on the wheel.

EN ROUTE

E146784

A) Protective cap

B) Pressure relief valve

C) Hose

D) Pressure gauge

E) Power plug with cable

F) Compressor switch

G) Label

H) Sealant bottle

iNote: Make sure you regularly check the

expiry date on the sealant bottle.

Using the tire sealant and inﬂator kit

WARNING: The sealant contains natural

rubber latex. Avoid contact with skin and

clothing. If this happens. rinse the aﬀected

areas immediately with plenty of water and

consult a physician.

WARNING: Do not leave the kit unattended

when it is in use. Failure to follow this

instruction could result in personal injury or

death.

WARNING: Check the sidewall of the

tyre prior to inﬂation. If there are any cracks.

bumps or similar damage, do not attempt to

inﬂate the tyre. This could cause personal

injury.

1. Check for a punctured tyre.

iNote: Do not remove objects. For example,

nails or screws from a punctured tyre.

2. Open the lid of the tyre sealant and inﬂater

kit.

3. Peel oﬀ the label G showing the maximum

permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) from

the casing and attach it to the instrument

panel in the driver’s ﬁeld of view. Make

sure the label does not obscure anything

important.

4. Take the hose C and the power plug with

cable E out of the temporary mobility kit.

5. Screw the hose C onto the sealant bottle.

6. Remove the valve cap from the damaged

tyre.

7. Remove the protective cap A from the

sealant bottle hose and screw the hose

ﬁrmly onto the valve of the damaged tyre.

8. Make sure that the compressor switch F is in

position O.

9. Insert the power plug E into the auxiliary

power point.

10. Start the engine.

WARNING: Do not stand directly beside the

tyre while the compressor is operating. This

could cause personal injury if the tyre bursts.

11. Move the compressor switch F to position 1.

12. After a minimum of two minutes, move

the compressor switch F to position 0 and

unscrew the hose C from the sealant bottle.

Unscrew the sealant bottle hose from the

tyre valve.

13. Screw the hose C onto the tyre valve and

move the compressor switch F to position 1.

WARNING: Watch the sidewall of the tyre

when inﬂating. If any cracks, bumps or similar

damage appears, switch the compressor oﬀ

and let the air out by means of the pressure

relief valve. Do not continue driving with this

tyre. This could cause loss of vehicle control.

WARNING: Do not keep the compressor

operating for more than 10 minutes. This could

cause the compressor to malfunction causing

serious personal injury.

SAFETY AND SECURITY

5. Safety and Security

5.1 Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

5.2 Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

5.3 Escape paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

5.4 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

5.5 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

5.6 CO alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

5.7 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

5.8 Swift Command Tracker by Sargent (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

5.9 VIN CHIP™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

5.1 Fire

iNote: Your attention is drawn to the notice

aﬃxed inside the wardrobe advising on ﬁre

precaution, ventilation and what to do in case

of ﬁre.

In case of ﬁre

Get everyone out of the motorhome as quickly

as possible using whichever exit is the quickest,

including windows. Do not stop to collect any

personal items.

Raise the Alarm. Call the Fire Brigade.

Turn oﬀ the gas supply valve if it is safe to do so.

Turn oﬀ the electricity supply at supply point.

Smoke Alarm Operation

Your motorhome is ﬁtted with a Fire Angel SB1

smoke alarm. Please read the user instructions

for the smoke alarm, which are available at the

following location:

https://www.ﬁreangel.co.uk/products/sb1-t

If you are unable to view the documents on line,

please contact the supplier, your dealer or Swift

for an electronic or paper copy.

WARNING: Never use portable cooking or

heating equipment other than electric heaters

that are not of the direct radiant type, as it is a

ﬁre and asphyxiation hazard.

WARNING: Appliances such as cookers

must not be used for heating.

5.2 Fire Extinguisher

It is recommended that a dry powder ﬁre

extinguisher be carried inside your motorhome

at all times.

When using a dry powder extinguisher it is

suggested that the motorhome be evacuated

until the powder has settled, to avoid inhalation.

A fat pan ﬁre should not have a ﬁre extinguisher

aimed at it. It should be smothered with a ﬁre

blanket.

WARNING: Provide one dry powder ﬁre

extinguisher of an approved type or complying

with EN3-7 or ISO 7165, of at least 1kg

capacity, by the main exterior door and a ﬁre

blanket next to the cooker. Familiarise yourself

with the instructions on your ﬁre extinguisher

and the local ﬁre precaution arrangements.

5.3 Escape paths

It is important that you do not block escape

paths to emergency exits with obstructions or

hazards.

5.4 Children

Do not leave children alone in the motorhome in

any event. Keep potentially dangerous items out

of reach, as at home e.g. matches, medicine etc.

SAFETY AND SECURITY

5.5 Ventilation

All motorhomes comply with BS EN 721. The

ventilation points on your motorhome are ﬁxed

points of ventilation which are required by the

European Standards.

All motorhomes have ventilation at high level

and low level which have been calculated to suit

the individual needs of your motorhome.

High level ventilation is achieved by means of

the roof lights and washroom roof ventilators

(where applicable). The low level ventilators are

positioned under sink units/fridge cupboards.

Under no circumstances must these vents be

blocked or obstructed in any manner as this

could lead to insuﬃcient fresh air. In this case

the conﬁned atmosphere becomes depleted of

oxygen which could lead to dangerous levels of

carbon dioxide (CO2) build up leading to the risk

of asphyxiation.

The risks of carbon monoxide (CO) build up,

which is a colourless, odourless and tasteless

gas, will also be reduced with ventilation.

Carbon monoxide is produced from incomplete

combustion and should the CO detector

be activated the cause of the incomplete

combustion must be investigated prior to

reusing the appliance in question.

It is advised that ﬁxed ventilation points are

checked and cleaned (if necessary) on a regular

basis using a small brush and a domestic

vacuum cleaner.

Additional night time ventilation is obtained by

releasing the window catches and placing them

in the second groove. Note the windows are not

sealed from rain in this position.

As the ventilation levels are calculated to suit

each model requirements no modiﬁcations

should be made which may result in reduced

ventilation levels.

WARNING: Do not obstruct ventilation.

5.6 CO alarm

Your motorhome is ﬁtted with a Fireangel CO-

9XT-FF Carbon Monoxide Alarm. To activate

the alarm, you will need to pull the disabling

tab as shown in the above image. For further

information, please read the instructions for

the alarm, which are available at the following

location:

https://www.ﬁreangel.co.uk/product/co-9xt-ﬀ/

If you are unable to view the documents on line,

please contact the supplier, your dealer or Swift

for an electronic or paper copy.

5.7 Security

Motorhome theft:

The theft of a motorhome can occur in the

most unlikely circumstances; from a motorway

service area or even an owner’s driveway.

Secure all windows and doors when your

motorhome is unoccupied even if only for a short

length of time.

VIN (Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number)

Record your motorhome VIN. This can be found

at the bottom of the windscreen, on the Swift

and Ford plates on the passenger cab door B

pillar or on the Fiat plate on front cross member

within the engine compartment.

Make a note of these numbers in the space

provided at the front of this handbook and make

a separate note of the numbers to keep safe at

home.

SAFETY AND SECURITY

Additional security

Consider ﬁtting any device which might deter

intrusion by thieves. Customers are advised

to identify their motorhome with a method

for subsequent identiﬁcation if other forms of

identiﬁcation have been altered or removed.

Free crime prevention advice about securing

your motorhome, protecting your valuables,

property marking either at home or whilst on

site, can be obtained from the Crime Prevention

Oﬃcer through your local Police station.

5.8 Swift Command Tracker by

Sargent (where ﬁtted)

A Swift Command Tracker when built into

your vehicle forms part of the Swift Command

system.

The unit is Thatcham Category S7 certiﬁed and

is monitored by an approved monitoring centre

which operates 24 hours a day 7 days a week

and provides European coverage and direct

police liaison.

This system is ready for use, all you need to do

is purchase a tracking subscription by visiting

www.swiftcommand.co.uk or calling Sargent on

01482 881655.

For more information including subscription

costs please visit:

www.swiftcommand.co.uk

Operation

The Swift Command Tracker is easy to operate

as it is controlled by the vehicle systems.

In a motorhome the tracker is armed / disarmed

by the ignition key.

When the ignition is turned oﬀ the tracker

is armed. When the ignition is turned on the

tracker is disarmed.

Event of a Theft

If the vehicle is moved whilst the tracker is

armed the geo-fence monitoring will trigger a

theft event.

The monitoring station will now contact you

to conﬁrm the theft or false alarm. You will be

required to conﬁrm your identity against the

information you provided when you subscribed.

If a genuine theft is conﬁrmed the monitoring

station will liaise with the police and keep you

informed of progress.

iNote; during a theft event to comply with

legislation you will not be able to manually

locate your vehicle using the Swift Command

locate feature.

Contact

Before contacting any of the following please

ensure you know your caravan or motorhome

serial number. For motorhomes this is the

unique MH number (like MH01234).

The Swift Command Tracker monitoring station

can be contacted on 0345 6027302. The stations

operates 24 hours a day 7 days a week.

Sargent customer support can be contacted on

01482 678981 or via support@ swiftcommand.

co.uk

Telephone lines are manned during normal

oﬃce hours.

Swift customer support can be contacted on

01482 875740 during normal oﬃce hours.

Precautions

The Swift Command Tracker monitors the

leisure battery supply and if the voltage falls

below a set level or the battery is removed this

will trigger a fault event.

If you plan to remove your battery for

maintenance or external charging please

contact the monitoring station BEFORE

removing the battery.

If you lose an ignition key you will need to visit a

Fiat dealer for key replacement and removal of

the ‘lost’ key.

SAFETY AND SECURITY

5.9 VIN CHIP™

Your motorhome has been securely marked and

the VIN recorded with VIN CHIP™.

VIN CHIP™ is the industry standard security

marking system for touring caravans and

motorhomes.

Shortly after purchasing this motorhome.

you will receive via email your VIN CHIP™

registration document. This document will

include the 17 digit VIN (vehicle identiﬁcation

number) and other relevant details about

your motorhome. If you sell your motorhome,

please follow the instructions on the VIN CHIP

motorhome document.

VIN CHIP identiﬁcation

The motorhome’s unique 17 character VIN will

be incorporated into VIN CHIP tamper evident

labels;

The master VIN CHIP label is situated on the

front near side window to aid police checking,

another in the gas locker and a maximum of 10

placed on the inside of the windows (with the

exception of opaque windows).

Three electronic RFID chips containing the

individual identity of your motorhome are

concealed within the vehicle and can only be

read by using a specially programmed RFID

scanner.

Your local police can obtain the use of a VIN

CHIP™ scanner by contacting VIN CHIP on

tel: 0333 2124746.

For help, support and advice, contact:

VIN CHIP

PO Box 445

Aldershot

GU11 9SF

Tel 0333 2124746

www.vinchip.co.uk

SAFETY AND SECURITY

ARRIVAL AT SITE

6. Arrival at the site

6.1 Positioning the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

6.2 Awnings and Tents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

ARRIVAL AT SITE

6.1 Positioning the motorhome

iNote: Check and observe site regulations.

Keep to roadways unless otherwise directed.

Adhere to speed limits. Note that these are

generally 10mph.

(Remember that the stopping distance on grass

is considerably greater than on tarmac.)

Only a person in possession of a current driving

licence may drive on the site.

Selecting a pitch

Do not pitch in such a position that your

motorhome will obstruct others coming in.

Try to choose an area which is dry, reasonably

level and preferably with a hard base.

If you have no alternative but to pitch on a slope

try to ensure that you are facing down the slope,

for when you leave.

Levelling the motorhome

Levelling must be carried out in both directions

for the refrigerator and other equipment to

function correctly. Stepped levelling boards

(Fig. A) or proprietary ramps are ideal for this

purpose. Levelling pads or boards should be

used under the wheels where the ground is soft

or uneven.

Fig. A Stepped levelling board

6.2 Awnings and Tents

Awnings and tents should only be used when

permission has been obtained. When on grass

and staying for more than a few days the ground

sheet and/or side ﬂaps of awnings should be

periodically raised in order to avoid damage to

the ground.

SERVICES

7. Services

7.1 Water system - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

7.2 Fresh water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

7.3 Priming the Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

7.4 Cleaning water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

7.5 Pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

7.6 Waste water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

7.7 Tank heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

7.8 Water level sensor & cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

7.9 Water fault ﬁnding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

7.10 Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

7.11 Types of gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

7.12 En-route heating (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

7.13 Gas safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

7.14 Gas fault ﬁnding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

7.15 The electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

7.16 230V mains electrical equipment power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

7.17 Wiring of connecting cable and motorhome mains inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

7.18 Typical appliance consumption ﬁgures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

SERVICES

7.1 Water system - Introduction

General advice

All Swift Group motorhome water systems

have been designed around a pump ﬁtted

within the motorhome. This pump draws water

from an under ﬂoor or internal water tank,

to provide water pressure within the water

system, whenever it is switched on and water is

available.

The schematic below shows the basic

conﬁguration of the water system:

When power is supplied to the pump, it will draw

water from the water tank, and pump it to the

motorhome taps, shower and water heater.

The pump is ﬁtted with its own pressure switch,

and will continue to pump water, until the

pressure of water on the output of the pump

reaches a pre-set level. For this pressure to be

achieved, the taps must be closed.

When the taps are opened, water will leave the

tap via the spout, and the pressure in the pipes

between the pump and the taps will reduce.

Because of this reduction in pressure, the

pressure switch on the pump will switch back

on and the pump will again run to pump more

water.

Close to the pump, the water under pressure is

split into two paths:

Through blue water pipes routed directly to the

cold connection of each tap.

To the water heater.

Water from the pump enters the bottom of the

water heater. Once the water ﬁlls the water

heater (typically 10 litres), water then leaves

the water heater via a connection at the top of

that water heater. This water, which is still under

pressure, then routes to the hot connection of

each tap via the red pipes.

To winterise the system please see separate

details later in this handbook.

SECURITY

7.2 Fresh water system

All ﬁttings, including the holding tank, water

pipes, taps and connections are of food quality

material (to BS6920) and therefore, should

not aﬀect the quality of the water used. It is

recommended however, that the system is

ﬂushed through twice before it is used for the

ﬁrst time, and always cleaned/ﬂushed after it

has stood unused for a period of time (eg over

the winter period). Care has been taken (using

smooth bore pipes etc) to eliminate as many

water traps as possible.

When ﬁlling the fresh water system remember

to check that the water source is suitable for use

as drinking water. If possible avoid using water

sources which use desalination or other similar

processing, as they may contain chemicals that

could damage the stainless steel components

within your motorhome water system. If in

doubt, check locally before using a water supply.

If you are using a hose pipe or water carrier,

ensure this is made from nontoxic materials

(preferably food grade material)

Motorhome Water Tank Drains

Depending on the speciﬁcation, the fresh water

tank will be ﬁtted with either a bung in the

bottom of the tank, or a manually or electrically

operated drain valve. Check the bung is in place,

or the valve is closed, before ﬁlling the fresh

tank:

Edge models

To remove the bung, ﬁrst remove the tank

lid and then carefully pull on the chain which

secures the bung to the inside of the tank. Keep

the bung clear of the drain hole until the tank is

empty, and replace before re-ﬁlling the tank.

Voyager models

Locate the blue plastic drain valve on the rear

oﬀside of the vehicle under the side skirt and

turn the tap to open or close the valve.

Escape and Ascari models

Controls for the electrically operated drain

valves are present in the upper kitchen

cupboard, valves on the fresh and waste tanks

can be controlled separately.

An LED indication on each switch will show

whether the drain valve is open (Amber LED) or

closed (Green LED).

Kon-Tiki models

The electrically operated drain valves are

normally closed. On the control panel above

the door, it is possible to check this: The ‘empty

fresh’ and ‘empty waste’ buttons will be ﬂashing

if the valve is open, and will not ﬂash if the

valve is closed. Press the button on the touch

screen to open or close the valve. See the Swift

Command instructions later in this handbook for

further details.

Boiler / Water System Drain

The boiler / water system drain valve is located

close to Alde or Truma heating appliance. To

drain the system lift the yellow handle to the

vertical position (f) The drain is closed when the

handle is in the horizontal position (e).

SERVICES

WARNING: The fresh water system is

pressurised by a pump which will continue to

operate until it senses a pre-set pressure in

the system.

If the fresh water tank is completely empty the

pump will be unable to pressurise the system

and will operate continuously. In this situation

it is essential that, in order to avoid damage

to the pump, it is switched oﬀ using the pump

isolator switch on the distribution panel until

such time as the water tank has been ﬁlled.

Fresh Water Tank

Your motorhome is ﬁtted with a water tank ﬁlled

from the outside via a lockable water ﬁller cap.

When ﬁlling, use a hose manufactured from non

toxic material, to prevent tainting of the water.

Remember, if the water heater has been drained

it will require 10 litre (0.2 gal) of water to ﬁll it.

External 12v Fill Socket

Depending on speciﬁcation your motorhome

may be ﬁtted with an external 12v socket which

can be used to attach an external 12v tank ﬁlling

pump.

7.3 Priming the Water System

When water is ﬁrst introduced, or the water

supply in the internal tank, runs out, air will be

present in the pipework. It is important that

every tap is run to remove any air in the system

before, for instance, the shower is used. Air

left in pipework local to a tap can act as an

accumulator and aﬀect the ratio of hot and cold

water ﬂowing from other taps or shower mixers

in the system.

1. Close the fresh water tank drain valve.

2. Fill the water tank with water.

3. Close the water heater drain valve (see

boiler instructions in the ﬁtted equipment

section)

4. Open all the taps except the shower tap.

Mixer taps should be opened in the central

position so that both the hot and cold pipes

are purged of air. Ensure the tap spouts are

over the sinks.

5. Turn on the pump using the button on the

control panel above the entrance door.

6. Turn each tap oﬀ in turn as and when the air

is expelled and the water runs smoothly from

each tap. Move the mixer taps to hot and then

cold to check that the air is out of both the hot

and cold pipes before turning them oﬀ.

7. Whilst holding the shower head down

towards the shower drain, open the shower

tap and shower head tap until all the air is

expelled and the water runs smoothly. Turn

the shower taps oﬀ.

8. Top up the fresh tank with water.

Please note that priming the system will

automatically ﬁll the water heater with water.

Please ensure all taps are fully turned oﬀ when

not in use (except when winterising).

iNote: All tanks are ﬁtted with a breather

which acts as an overﬂow. Overﬁlling a tank

will result in water being expelled from the

overﬂow outside the vehicle.

7.4 Cleaning water system

Clean the water system at the start and end of

the season with sterilising ﬂuid.

Sterilising

When cleaning the water system at the start

or the end of the season it is advisable to use

a suitable sterilising ﬂuid available from your

motorhome dealer. The ﬂuid must be suitable

for use with stainless steel components

Flush the system thoroughly to remove the

eﬀective ﬂuid traces.

When water is ﬁrst introduced, or the water

supply in the internal tank, runs out, air will be

present in the pipework. It is important that

every tap is run to remove any air in the system

before, for instance, the shower is used. Air

left in pipework local to a tap can act as an

accumlator and aﬀect the ratio of hot and cold

water ﬂowing from other taps or shower mixers

in the system.

Edge fresh water tank showing central

cleaning hatch

System care

Allowing water to freeze in the system may

result in damage to the pump and plumbing

system.

Non-Toxic antifreeze for potable water may be

used with Truma pumps. Follow manufacturers

recommendations.

Do not use automotive antifreeze to winterize

potable water systems.

These solutions are highly toxic and may cause

serious injury or death if ingested.

Sanitising

The water systems, and in particular storage

tanks, in motorhomes are susceptible to

contamination by bacteria if care is not taken

with their use and cleaning. The symptoms

caused by bacterial contamination are not

purely limited to gastro-intestinal diseases,

but may also manifest themselves as ear, nose,

throat, eye or skin infections. It is therefore

important that you carry out the following

procedure prior to using the motorhome each

time, even if you boil or ﬁlter all water you use

for drinking.

Separate Water Containers

1. All water remaining in the container should

be disposed of so that the container is empty.

2. The outside of the container should be

thoroughly cleansed and washed down to

remove any dirt, dust or other contaminant.

Water at a suitably hot temperature

containing an appropriate detergent is

recommended for this purpose.

3. Water should be put in the container, swirled

around, then emptied out.

4. The container should then be totally ﬁlled

with water containing an appropriate

sterilant solution and allowed to stand for

the recommended contact time.

5. The solution should be emptied from the

container.

6. The opening of the container should be

cleaned thoroughly with an appropriate

prepared wipe impregnated with a sterilant.

SERVICES

7. The container should be inverted whilst

stored overnight (if possible).

8. The container must be ﬁlled with mains

water only and mains water only should be

used for the above cleaning procedure.

9. On no account should garden hoses be used

to ﬁll water tanks.

For Systems:

1. Drain down the system (open all taps to

allow air in, enabling the system to drain

quickly).

2. Remove any water ﬁlters ﬁtted, and replace

with a short length of hose or empty ﬁlter

cartridge (this will ensure the ﬁlter is not

aﬀected by the disinfectant/ sterilant

solution).

3. Fill the water system with a disinfectant/

sterilant solution (check that the solution at

full strength appears at all taps/showers).

Allow to stand for the recommended period

of time.

4. Drain the system completely.

5. Thoroughly clean the outside of all taps/

connectors with a cloth soaked in the

disinfectant/sterilant.

6. Flush the system through with clean drinking

water until no traces of disinfectant/sterilant

can be detected at any tap.

Suitable sterilising chemicals are available

from your motorhome dealer, accessory shop,

chemist or home-brew shops. It is not, however,

recommended to use bleach or sodium

metabisulphite.

Sterilising

Do not use products that contain aggressive

agents for sterlising the water system. Always

use products designed for stainless steel tanks

available from your motorhome dealer.

iNote: Never use the water heating system

when disinfectant/sterilising ﬂuid is present.

Doing so may damage the system.

7.5 Pressure switch

The purpose of a pressure switch is to monitor

the pressure on the outlet side of the pump.

When a tap is closed, and the pump continues

to run, there is an increase of pressure in the

system, and when that pressure reaches a

pre-set limit, the pressure switch will turn the

pump oﬀ.

Pressure switch adjustment

Pressure Switch Adjustment, Truma/Flo-Jet

pump. (Normally Grey upper section with White

lower section/valve housing)

• All of the Truma/Flo-Jet pumps used by Swift

are pre-set at 25psi - 31psi.

• To further adjust the pressure switch setting,

a cover cap must be ﬁrst be removed from the

end of the pump to reveal a pressure adjusting

screw, as shown in the photos. A maximum

of 1/4 turn clockwise or anti-clockwise, from

the factory setting, is advised. Turning the

screw clockwise 1/4 turn will increase the

pressure switch cut-out pressure, turning the

screw anti-clockwise will reduce the pressure

setting.

• Please note a second screw mounted below

the cover cap is set in position with threadlock,

this should not be disturbed.

Cover cap

Pressure switch

adjusting screw

The pump may have to be removed to gain

access to the adjusting screw. Drain the water

system before removing the pump.

To remove the pump pull the blue taps at right

angles to the pipe work and lift the pump out.

SERVICES

7.6 Waste water system

1. The waste water holding tank is secured

below the ﬂoor of the motorhome, and is

gravity fed.

iNote: Should the waste water tank be

overﬁlled, it is possible that waste water will

backﬁll the pipes until it eventually appears

in the shower tray. In order to prevent this,

please monitor the water level gauges on the

motorhome control panel. It is also possible

to to enable a ‘waste tank full’ alarm, on the

control panel.

2. Depending on the speciﬁcation, the waste

water tank will be ﬁtted with either a

manually or electrically operated drain valve.

Edge and Voyager models

A grey manually operated drain valve will be

located externally, close to the motorhome skirt.

Escape and Ascari models

Controls for the electrically operated drain

valves are present in the upper kitchen

cupboard.

An LED indication on each switch will show

whether the drain valve is open (Amber LED) or

closed (Green LED).

Kon-Tiki models

The electrically operated drain valves are

normally closed. On the control panel above

the door, it is possible to check this: The ‘empty

waste’ button will be ﬂashing if the valve is open,

and will not ﬂash if the valve is closed. Press the

button on the touch screen to open or close the

valve. See the Swift Command instructions later

in this handbook for further details.

7.7 Tank heaters

Depending on speciﬁcation, your motorhome

may be ﬁtted with 12v tank heaters, designed to

prevent or reduce instances of freezing water in

ﬁtted water tanks.

If tank heaters are ﬁtted, they can be turned on

via the control panel above the entrance door.

For Edge, Ascari and Escape the control is a

button on the fascia of the EC400+ control panel.

For Kon Tiki the control is in the water system

page of the EC800 touch screen control panel.

Turn the feature on when external temperatures

are low, and the tank heaters will then provide

heat automatically, and only when required.

Before heating each tank the system will check

that the water level in each tank is at the 1/4

level or higher (the heaters will not operate

if the tank is ‘empty’). If the water level is

appropriate, the heaters will then switch on and

oﬀ depending on temperature.

As the tank heaters check the water level in each

tank, the fresh and waste water tank heaters

can operate independently, for instance use of

frost protect feature while the fresh tank is full,

but waste tank is empty, would only result in the

operation of the fresh tank heater.

It is also possible to use the tank heaters en-

route, i.e. while driving. With the control panel

ON, turn on the tank heaters as described above.

While the engine is running the control panel

cannot be operated, however, the tank heater

circuits will remain ON.

Please note that the heating elements use a 12V

supply. With the engine oﬀ, and if used without

a mains hook up and charger operating, then

leisure battery power consumption will be

increased (see consumption table on page 64

for more information).

SERVICES

7.8 Water level sensor & cleaning

Principle

The sensor, ﬁtted to Swift Group motorhomes

are pre-ﬁtted to water tanks, and link to the

control unit, via a pre-ﬁtted wiring harness. The

sensors, which consist of a number of stainless

steel rods or probes, at diﬀerent lengths, are

immersed in the fresh or waste water, and use

the conductivity of water, between the probes,

to provide a reading to the control unit.

The sensors are ‘digital’, in that while the

conductivity (resistance) value can vary, the

fusebox will register any conductivity between

the reference probe and the various diﬀerent

length probes, indicating water present.

Normally, even if the rods are dirty, and

providing the rods have not bridged by a foreign

object, a circuit will still be delivered back to the

control unit and a water level displayed.

Sensor cleaning

The ﬁrst step, in case of fault diagnosis, is

to clean the sensor rods. False water level

readings at the control unit can be caused by

calcium build-up or foreign objects within the

tank bridging the probes. (Especially with waste

tanks).

To clean sensor:

WARNING: Only use food safe plastic mesh

scourers, which are suitable for domestic use,

for cleaning the sensor studs.

1. Remove the sensor from the tank

2. Check the probes for build up of

contamination

3. Use clean, soapy water

4. Place scourer in water to dampen

5. Apply scourer to the sensor probes with

limited pressure

6. Rub sensor probes, removing contamination

7. Swill sensor probes with fresh, clean water

8. Replace sensor into tank.

iNote: Tank levels are measured in

increments of 25%

SERVICES

Fault Cause Remedy

Water not ﬂowing from

any tap when operated

but pump runs

Freshwater tank empty

Water system not primed

Pump wired in reverse

Pipe inlet or outlet pipe disconnected

Pump pipes restricted by kinking

Blocked pump ﬁlter

Air leak in suction line to pump

Frozen pipes

Low voltage

Check

Ensure water system has been primed

correctly, (see priming the water system

section 7.3), and there are no air-locks

present

Check wiring, refer to pump

manufacturer’s instructions

Check connections

Check pipe runs

Check, starting at the freshwater tank

Dismantle and clean ﬁlter. See pump

manufacturer’s instructions.

Check condition of pipe and pipe joints

between the water tank and the pump.

Defrost pipes

Using a multimeter check that the voltage

is between 10 and 14.5 volts. If it is, refer

to your dealer.

Pump does not run No electrical power

Pump fuse blown

Pump incorrectly wired

Low voltage

Pump seized or overheated

Pressure pump sensing switch may have

failed or requires adjusting

Check battery is connected and charged

or electrical hook up connected

Check wiring connection and then

replace with fuse of correct rating

Refer to pump manufacturers

instructions

Using a multimeter check that the voltage

is between 10 and 14.5 volts. If it is, refer

to your dealer.

Allow to cool before retrying and if still

not working refer to pump manufacturers

servicing instructions

Refer to pump manufacturers servicing

instructions and section 7.5 for adjusting

the pressure switch

7.9 Water fault ﬁnding

SERVICES

Fault Cause Remedy

Water ﬂows from hot

tap but has reduced

ﬂow from cold

Cold water pipe kinked preventing ﬂow

Blockage in cold pipe line

Cold tap not connected

Cold tap failed or blocked

Check and re-route if necessary

Disconnect pipes after 1st connector and

check up to tap

Refer to installation instructions

Disconnect and inspect

Water Fault Finding

Pump does not run Contacts may be faulty

Wiring connections may be faulty

Frost damage to pump due not draining

overwinter

Check contacts in plug and socket are

clean and making contact

Check wiring connections

Replace pump

Water ﬂows from cold

tap but not from hot

Blockage in hot pipeline

Heater inlet or outlet pipes kinked

preventing ﬂow

Hot tap failed or blocked

Heater

non-return valve jammed

Disconnect pipes and inspect

Check and re-route if necessary.

Disconnect and inspect

Seek service attention

Fault Cause Remedy

SERVICES

Reduced ﬂow from both

hot and cold taps

Battery condition low causing pump to

run slowly

If new taps have been ﬁtted they may be

restricting ﬂow

Pump needs servicing

Partially blocked pump ﬁlter or in-line

ﬁlter, if ﬁtted

Pump outlet pipe kinked restricting ﬂow

Water leak

Check battery state of charge, refer to

electrical supply note

Disconnect and check that they have at

least 1/4” (6.3mm) bore

Refer to pump servicing instructions

Dismantle and clean if necessary

Check and re-route if necessary

Check all water connections

Reduced ﬂow from

either tap

Pipe kinking restricting ﬂow

Bore size diﬀerence in taps

Check and re-route if necessary

Use taps of equal bore size

If pump motor runs

steadily and will not

stop

Battery voltage may be too low (below

10.5 volts)

Check that there is water in the container

Adjust switch and/or re-charge battery.

Check all connections in pipework

SERVICES

BBQ (when fitted)

Fridge

Hob and Grill

Hob/Grill/Oven

Manifold

Alde or Truma

heating Appliance

Regulator

Typical gas schematic drawing with

Combi or Alde Boiler

Gas Cylinder

Oven / Hob

7.10 Gas

General information

Gas Cylinders

Bottled Liquiﬁed Petroleum Gas (LPG) is the

most convenient portable source of fuel for your

vehicle.

The gas cylinder, cooking and heating

appliances should be isolated when travelling

unless your motorhome is ﬁtted with en-route

heating.

Regularly check ﬂexible gas hose, joints and

connections for tightness. Finally make sure

that each gas appliance is working eﬃciently

to the recommendations of the appliance

manufacturers.

The LPG system should be inspected annually

by a competent person.

Only use gas cylinders that are located within

their dedicated position within the gas bottle

housing, never extend the hose - hose lengths

must not exceed 400mm.

Your vehicle is supplied with a wall mounted

gas regulator plumbed inside the gas bottle

compartment. The regulator and all appliances

work at a harmonised 30mb pressure, which

work with Butane and Propane gas.

Pressure regulation system in this vehicle

has a ﬁxed working pressure of 30 mbar with

a ﬂow rate of 1.5 kg/H and complies with the

requirements of EN 12864 annex D.

We do not recommend the use of an inline LPG

BBQ with the 1.5kg/H regulator when other LPG

appliances are in use.

Motorhomes with external barbeque point

Models equipped with an external barbeque

point can be used to power any gas appliance

suitable for the gas used in the motorhome, at

the working pressure shown on the label in the

barbeque outlet box. Please note when using

the outlet that the ﬁtted regulator will allow a

maximum of 1.5kg per hour of gas to be taken

from the gas bottle. Therefore the consumption

of gas from both the appliances within the

motorhome and the appliance connected to the

barbeque point cannot exceed a total of 1.5kg

per hour at any one time. If you are in any doubt

please consult your dealer for advice. To use the

barbeque point proceed as follows:

1. Fit male tail connector from despatch kit to

your barbeque or appliance ensuring a gas

tight joint. The work should be carried out by

a competent person; if in any doubt consult

your dealer.

2. Open box lid by pulling tab on bottom edge

and lifting, while pressing on centre of ﬂap.

3. Insert tail connector on appliance into

female coupling, twist to engage and lock.

4. Open gas locker on motorhome, ensure gas

bottle tap is open and supply is connected to

regulator.

5. Light and operate appliance to its

instructions.

Please note that you cannot open the gas supply

until the nozzle has been inserted. In the interest

of safety all external hose lengths should be

kept to a minimum and attachments secured

correctly.

WARNING: Care should be taken when

using the external barbeque point. Never

barbeque next to an awning or tent.

WARNING: The motorhome barbeque

point should only be used as an outlet point for

gas, never connect a gas bottle direct to the

outlet.

WARNING: Unless en-route heating is in

use the LPG cylinder valve should be closed

when driving.

WARNING: Switch oﬀ all gas appliances

when driving unless the motorhome has an

en-route heating regulator ﬁtted

Gas Hoses

High-pressure hoses or pigtails as they

are called must be used with the new style

regulator.

High-pressure hoses incorporate a safety shut

oﬀ valve for the use of the en-route heating

system.

LPG cylinder i.e. Propane, Butane, BP and

Camping Gaz cylinders all have unique bottle

adaptor connections.

SERVICES

It is important to check you have the correct

hose and adaptor to suit your gas cylinders.

Push on hoses are no longer permitted under

the latest regulations.

The new high-pressure hoses have threaded

connections and must be securely attached to

the regulator and to the gas cylinder.

The hose connection to the pressure regulator

relies upon a sealing washer(s) to maintain a

gas tight joint, and it is essential to check that

the washer is present, sound and correctly

positioned prior to making the connection.

The gas cylinder connection relies on a metal

seating or bull nose connection to obtain a

gas tight joint, therefore it is essential that the

mating surfaces are clean and undamaged. In

no case should a damaged valve or connection

be used.

Ensure that there is a constant rise in the ﬂexible

gas hose between the gas cylinder outlet and

the regulator elbow.

WARNING: Inspect ﬂexible gas hose(s)

regularly for deterioration and renew as

necessary with the approved type, in any

case no later than 5 years after the date of

manufacture marked on the hose. When

replacing the en-route hose ensure the new

hose incorporates a safety shut oﬀ valve (Hose

rupture protection).

WARNING: Ensure that the high pressure

hose is not excessively twisted or under stress

when connected to the LPG cylinders and

regulator.

WARNING: Always ensure the gas supply

is isolated at the LPG cylinder (and not at the

regulator) whilst the vehicle is in storage for

any period. It is important to ensure that the

high pressure gas hose has a continuous rise

from the bottle cylinder to the regulation to

allow any condensate to fall back into the gas

bottle cylinder.

Cylinder compartment

All cylinder compartments have four plastic

mouldings per cylinder position ﬁtted to the

ﬂoor of the compartment that are designed to

ﬁt both steel and BP Gas Light cylinders. Two

straps are provided for retaining the bodies of

the cylinders at mid to high level.

7.11 Types of gas

Propane

Propane is supplied in red, or partly red

cylinders which have a female left hand

threaded connector.

Scandinavian countries use the same connector.

Germany and Austria supply propane with a

male connection.

Propane will work at temperatures as low as

-40°C and is therefore suitable for all winter

motorhoming.

iNote: Swift recommend that 6kg Calor

propane cylinders are used (except Ascari

which can hold 3.9kg propane cylinders).

However the cylinder compartments can also

house various cylinders dependant on model.

Edge (1 x 6kg +1 x 13kg)

Ascari (2 x 3.9kg)

Voyager / Escape / Kon-Tiki 700/800 (1 x 6kg

+ 1 x 13kg)

Kon-Tiki 900 2 x 13kg

Butane

Butane is supplied in the U.K. in green or blue

cylinders.

All these have a male left hand thread

EXCEPT for Camping Gaz which has a special

female right hand thread and Calor 7kg and

15kg and aluminium bottles which have a

special clip-on connection.

Continental cylinders usually have a male left

hand thread similar to but not identical with U.K.

butane.

Butane is only suitable for use at temperatures

down to 2°C and will not work below that.

iNote: If an en-route heating regulator is

ﬁtted, a hose suitable for use with propane will

have been supplied with your motorhome.

SERVICES

7.12 En-route heating (where ﬁtted)

If your motorhome is equipped with an LPG

en-route heating system, it comes installed with

additional safety features.

WARNING: When re-fuelling your

motorhome, switch oﬀ the heater and close

the cylinder valve.

Safety features

• MonoControl CS regulator or DuoControl CS

regulator on some models incorporating a

crash sensor which stops the gas ﬂow in the

event of the motorhome being involved in a

traﬃc collision.

• Gas ﬂow monitor

• Hose rupture protection is installed.

• The full system is Homologated in compliance

with UN ECE regulation 122

Operating instructions

1. Open cylinder valve

2. Firmly press the hose rupture protection

(green button) on the high pressure hose for

about 5 seconds (ﬁg 1 item 1)

3. If the Yellow reset button (ﬁg 2, item 7) is not

pressed (“not ready for operation” position),

reset the crash sensor. To reset, press the

Yellow reset button (ﬁg 2, item 7) ﬁrmly turn

it slightly clock-wise, hold it for 5 seconds

and ensure that it stays in the “ready for

operation” position (ﬁgure 2). If the re-set

is not successful, use the Torx (T20) screw

aid (ﬁg 3, item 12) to support the clockwise

rotation.

iNote: The regulator should be replaced no

more than ten years after manufacture.

Changing a gas cylinder

Please use the correct size spanner for the gas

hose connectors as this will prevent damage

to the screw ﬁttings and ensure that the ﬁtting

is tightened suﬃciently. Also ensure that the

replacement gas cylinder is of the correct type

& size.

• Turn oﬀ all gas appliances

• Close the empty gas cylinder’s valve

• Remove the high pressure hose from the gas

cylinder.

• Attach the high pressure hose to the full gas

cylinder.

• Open the full cylinder’s valve.

• Press the hose-break safety device

Check the hose connection to the cylinder valve

for leaks.

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

WARNING: To ensure the safe working of

the en-route heating any replacement high

pressure hoses must be of the same type as

originally ﬁtted. They must have the safety

valve to ensure that the gas does not leak out

in the event of damage to the gas pipe work in

the event of a traﬃc collision.

WARNING: When travelling using the en-

route system all other LPG appliance shut oﬀ

valves must be in the closed position including

the fridge, cooker, water heater etc.

iNote: It is dangerous and illegal to operate

other LPG appliances whilst travelling.

WARNING: Never allow modiﬁcations

or repairs of electrical or LPG systems and

appliances except by qualiﬁed persons.

WARNING: When leaving the motorhome

for any period of time or storage always turn

oﬀ the gas at the gas cylinder.

SERVICES

7.13 Gas safety advice

WARNING: : If you smell gas or suspect a

leak or in the event of a ﬁre and if it is safe to

do so, isolate the gas appliances and turn oﬀ

the gas bottles at the regulator. Evacuate the

motorhome and ventilate. Seek professional

advice as to the cause of the leak.

Facts about LPG

LPG is not poisonous.

• Bi-products are harmless.

• There is danger if all air and oxygen were

excluded.

• (Ventilation holes must be kept clear at all

times).

• LPG has been given a smell by the

manufacturers in order to identify leaks.

Awning Spaces LPG Appliance Exhaust

There is no danger of pollution of an enclosed

awning space by the LPG exhaust from a

refrigerator venting into it, as awning spaces are

generally well ventilated.

Space heaters may produce suﬃcient exhaust to

pollute the awning space, if it is totally enclosed,

from a general comfort, smell and hygiene point

of view. In the extreme case there could be a

build up of carbon dioxide to a dangerous level.

Motorhome owners are advised to allow some

fresh air circulation in the awning space when

such appliances are in use.

General Safety Notes

In the event of leaks in the gas system or if there

is a smell of gas:

• Extinguish all naked ﬂames.

• Do not smoke.

• Switch oﬀ the appliance and gas cylinder.

• Open the windows.

• Do not operate any electrical switches.

• Have the entire system checked by an expert.

Precautions

a. Never look for a leak with a ﬂame. Always

use a soap solution or its equivalent when

testing connections. Do not operate any

electrical apparatus whatsoever, especially

light switches. If the leak is not obvious,

the motorhome should be evacuated and

qualiﬁed personnel consulted.

b. Avoid naked lights when connecting or

changing a cylinder.

c. Check the ﬂexible hose frequently.

d. The gas is heavier than air and therefore

sinks to the lowest point.

e. Keep bottle gas containers outside (and

protected against frost). If they must be kept

inside make sure they are well away from

heat.

WARNING: Do not use appliances with a

diﬀerent working pressure to 30mbar.

WARNING: Maintain adequate spacing of

combustible materials from sources of heat.

WARNING: Do not use independent

portable gas appliances inside the vehicle.

Cookers shall not be used as heaters.

WARNING: A BBQ point inlet valve, if

ﬁtted, must only be used for the connection of

portable LPG appliances.

WARNING: Always read individual

appliance instructions.

WARNING: If in doubt, ask for advice from a

competent person.

SERVICES

Connection

Ensure that the gas regulator hose is correctly

connected to the gas cylinder in gas bottle

compartment and that the hose connection is

tight.

Gas cylinders must be fully located, seated at

the base of the bottles and restrained by the

straps provided in the dedicated compartment

position. Straps are positioned to suit 6kg, 7kg

and 13kg bottles.

WARNING: If using cylinders other

than those recommended, the user must

ensure these are adequately supported,

ventilation openings must not be obstructed

and the cylinders must not cause damage

to other ﬁxtures and ﬁttings located in the

compartment.

Open ended gas hoses must always be

protected from dirt and insects.

Before turning on the gas supply at the

regulator, ensure that all gas operated

equipment in the motorhome is turned oﬀ.

All gas equipment is supplied through a Gas

Manifold System which has individual isolation

taps for each appliance (Fig A), as follows:

Fig. A

OFF

YELLOW - Hob

GREEN - Oven / Grill

BLUE - Fridge

RED - Water Heater

WHITE - Heater / Combination Boiler

Flue installations

All ﬂue installations should be inspected once a

year throughout their length for corrosion. Flues

should be replaced if any sign of perforation

is found. Ensure that the replacement is of an

approved type.

Thermal insulation heating

Your motorhome has been designed to achieve a

thermal insulation and heating level for speciﬁc

climatic conditions when tested according to the

procedure in EN1646-1.

See the motorhome technical book for the

classiﬁcation of your motorhome. All Swift

Group motorhomes achieve a Grade 3

classiﬁcation.

The classiﬁcations are as follows:

Grade 1

A motorhome with an average thermal

transmittance (u) that does not exceed 1.7w/

(m2k).

Grade 2

A motorhome with an average thermal

transmittance (u) that does not exceed 1.7w/

(m2k) and which can achieve an average

temperature diﬀerence of at least 20°C between

inside and outside temperatures when the

outside temperature is 0°C.

Grade 3

A motorhome with an average thermal

transmittance (u) that does not exceed 1.2w/

(m2k) and which can achieve an average

temperature diﬀerence of at least 35°C between

inside and outside temperatures when the

outside temperature is -15°C.

SERVICES

Fault Cause Remedy

Hob does not light No gas

Air in pipe

Check level of gas in cylinder

Check gas cylinder valve is on

Check gas taps are on

Purge system

Refer to hob manufacturers instructions

Oven does not light No gas

Air in pipe

Check level of gas in cylinder

Check gas cylinder valve is on

Check gas taps are on

Purge system

Refer to oven manufacturers instructions

BBQ does not light No gas

Over gassed

Air in pipe

Check level of gas in cylinder

Check gas cylinder valve is on

Check gas taps are on

Turn oﬀ appliance, wait 2 minutes and try

again

Purge system

Fridge does not light No gas

Air in pipe

Check level of gas in cylinder

Check gas cylinder valve is on

Check gas taps are on

Purge system

Refer to fridge manufacturers instructions

Combination Heater

does not light

No gas

Air in pipe

Check level of gas in cylinder

Check gas cylinder valve is on

Check gas taps are on

Purge system

Refer to water heater manufacturers

instructions

7.14 Gas fault ﬁnding

SERVICES

7.15 The electrical system

General Information

It is strongly advised that the mains installation

is inspected periodically to ensure safe use. The

IET (BS7671) wiring regulations recommend

that mains installations in motorhomes are re-

inspected every 3 years or annually if the van is

used frequently. The National Caravan Council

lists the qualiﬁcations necessary to perform this

inspection, but an NICEIC approved contractor is

probably the ﬁrst choice.

On arrival at the campsite

• Check the suitability of the supply, is it AC or

DC, is the voltage and frequency correct.

• Ensure that there is a proper earth (3 pin

socket outlet).

• If in doubt consult site staﬀ.

• Make sure that the supply from the site is

switched oﬀ.

• Make sure that the charger switch on the PSU

is switched oﬀ.

• Lift the cover on the electricity inlet on the

motorhome, and insert the connector on the

ﬂexible supply cable.

• At the site supply point, connect the other end

of the supply cable to this using the socket

provided.

• Switch on the main switch at the site supply

point.

iNote: It is good practice to test the RCD

(Residual Current Device) in the PSU before

switching on. There is a test button on the

RCD. To test the lever, put the lever in the up

position (on) before testing.

iNote: As with the RCD it is good practice

to check the Miniture Circuit Breaker (MCB)

in the PSU. Switch all to the on position (lever

up). If any do not stay up then there is a fault.

On departure from the campsite

• Switch oﬀ supply from the site, disconnect the

cable at both ends.

• Switch oﬀ RCD.

iNote: Never use a mains supply lead whilst

coiled. Always uncoil the full length before

connecting to the supply and remember to

protect the cable from traﬃc.

WARNING: Current consumption in the

motorhome must not exceed 16 amps or the

pitch permitted maximum if this is less than

16 amps.

Overseas connection

• Connection to a mains voltage overseas

requires particular attention.

• Overseas supplies can be of reverse polarity.

• Reverse polarity results in equipment not

necessarily being isolated when turned oﬀ,

reverse polarity indicator on the PSU will light

in the event of reverse polarity.

• The only sure way to make equipment safe is

to unplug it.

• It is useful to have a means of checking polarity

when overseas.

• If it can be achieved then connect live to live,

and neutral to neutral to achieve full electrical

protection.

WARNING: Never allow modiﬁcations

or repairs of electrical or LPG systems and

appliances except by qualiﬁed persons.

SERVICES

7.16 230V mains electrical equipment

power consumption

Please note: It is possible that the 230v mains

electrical equipment may not all operate

simultaneously. A typical UK site mains hook up

point provides a maximum output of 10 amps

and on some continental sites the available

output may be as low as 5 amps. If your loading

exceeds the site supply it may trip the site circuit

breaker. Please check the available mains

supply with your site operator.

Similarly loadings on each circuit breaker

within the motorhome should be observed. A

label positioned close to the MCB’s (Miniture

Circuit Breakers will identify which appliances

within the motorhome are fed from which MCB.

Consulting the typical appliance consumption

ﬁgures table in conjunction with this label, will

give an indication of which appliances can, and

cannot, (site supply allowing), be operated

simultaneously.

SERVICES

PITCH SUPPLY

OUTLET

CABLE COUPLER

MOTORHOME MAINS INLET

VIEW OF

FLEXIBLE 3 CORE CABLE 2.5mm

TERMINALS

FLEXIBLE WIRING FIXED WIRING

VIEW OF VIEW OF

SOCKET TUBES PINS

VIEW OF

TERMINALS

BLACK

NEUTRAL

EARTH

GREEN &YELLOW

NEUTRAL BLUE

LIVE BROWN

NEUTRAL BLACK

EARTH GREEN & YELLOW

LIVE RED

RED

LIVE

EARTH GREEN & YELLOW

LIVE

EARTH EARTH

BROWN

LIVE

BLUE

NEUTRAL

EARTH

YELLOW & GREEN

NEUTRAL NEUTRAL

VIEW OF

TERMINALS

VIEW OF VIEW OF

SOCKET TUBES

VIEW OF

PINS TERMINALS

BLUE

NEUTRAL

EARTH

BROWN

GREEN &YELLOW

LIVE

EARTH

BROWN

EARTH

LIVE

BLUE

NEUTRAL

EARTH

YELLOW & GREEN

NEUTRAL NEUTRAL

Wiring of connecting cable and motorhome mains inlet

The legal length of the mains inlet cable is 25 ± 2 metres. When in use it must be fully uncoiled and protected from trafﬁc.

7.17 Wiring of connecting cable and motorhome mains inlet

7.18 Typical appliance consumption ﬁgures

SERVICES

23 0 Vo lt 12 Vol t LP G as

Appliance/ Item Watts Amperes Watts Amperes grams/hour

Dometic Refrigerator 190 W 0.8 amp Only when driving 16 g/h

Truma Combi 4kw Heating System

900 / 1800 W 3.9 / 7.8 amp 13 w 1.1 amp (avg) 320 g/h

Truma Combi 6kw Heating System

900 / 1800 W 3.9 / 7.8 amp 13 w Up to 6.5 amps 480 g/h

Alde Heating System

1050 / 2100 / 3150 W 4.6 / 9.1 / 13.7 amp Up to 23w Up to 1.9 amps 245 - 460 g/h

Microwave (Factory fit) Up to 1270w Up to 5.5 amp Not Applicable

Not Applicable

Cooker - Hob burners Not applicable Not applicable 70 – 161 g/h each

Cooker – Electric Hotplate 800 w 3.5 amp Not applicable Not applicable

Grill Not applicable

0 - 14.4w

(Cooling fan)

0 - 1.2amp

(Cooling fan)

117 g/h

Oven Not applicable

0 - 14.4w

(Cooling fan)

0 - 1.2amp

(Cooling fan)

125 – 146 g/h

Battery Charger

690 W 3.0 amp Not applicable Not applicable

Omnivent Not applicable

2 w – 3 0 w

0.2 amp – 2.5 amp Not applicable

Powered bed mechanism Not applicable

M a x 2 4 0 w

Max 20amp Not applicable

Powered table mechanism Not applicable

U p t o 6 3 w

Up to 5amps Not applicable

12v LED lights (each, depending in size of light) Not applicable

0 . 4 w - 6 . 1 w

0.05 amp – 0.5 amp Not applicable

USB socket or USB charging socket within light Not applicable

U p t o 1 8 w

Up to 1.5 amps Not applicable

Water tank frost element (Winter pack) Not applicable

3 0 W

2.5 amp each Not applicable

Note: These are approximate figures for guidance only, and are subject to changes in specification. The figures show energy consumption when an item or

ppliance is operating – i.e. a light is illuminated, or a heating system is providing space heating or water heating. Appliances which feature LCD or

lluminated control panels can have a low current consumption when in stand by mode, or have a constant low current draw in the background to run their

isplays and electronic systems - these figures are typically 0.4 amps or less, for each applicable item. These electronic items can in most cases be switched

off individually, or, use of the System Shutdown button on the power supply unit isolates all of these items.

ELECTRICS

8. Electrics

8.1

EC400+ Motorhome Power Control System (Edge, Ascari, Voyager and Escape)

. . 70

8.2 Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

8.3 EC400 + Control Panel Component Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

8.4 System Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

8.5 Water System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

8.6 Frost Protection Operation (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

8.7 Solar Charge Management (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

8.8 Smart Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

8.9 Electric Step Operation (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

8.10 System Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

8.11 Generator Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

8.12 Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

8.13 Leisure Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

8.14 12 Volt DC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

8.15 Common Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

8.16 Contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

8.17 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

8.18 Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

8.19 Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

8.20 Swift Command Power Control System (Kon-Tiki) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

8.21 Control System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

8.22 EC800 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

8.23 System Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

8.24 System Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

8.25 Common Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

8.26 Remote Access & Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

8.27 Technical Data & Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

8.28 Motorhome battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

8.29 Solar panel connection point or Solar panel ﬁtment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

8.30 Accessory harnessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

8.31 Generator usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

8.32 Habitation relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

8.33 Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

8.1 EC400+ Motorhome Power

Control System (Edge, Ascari,

Voyager and Escape)

1. Introduction

This section of the handbook will guide you

through the operation of the electrical system.

All details are correct at the time of going to

press. Please also see the online version which

will include any later updates or amendments.

Further technical details are contained in

section 3 or in the supporting technical manual

available from www.sargentltd.co.uk

For the safe operation of all electrical equipment

within your Leisure Vehicle it is important

that you read and fully understand these

instructions. If you are unsure of any point,

please contact your dealer / distributor for

advice before use.

The system has a number of key components

that you will need to be familiar with before

attempting to use the system, these are:

• The EC454PSU or EC456PSU Power Supply

Unit - a combined mains consumer unit and

12V controller usually located in a storage area

(lower bed box, wardrobe or similar).

• The EC463 Control Panel - a remotely located

user control panel used to turn circuits on and

oﬀ and to display battery, water tank and other

system information.

• The PX300 Intelligent 300W Battery charger.

ELECTRICS

8.2 Using the System

Power Supply Unit - Component Layout (see

image on previous page)

The PSU is located in the front oﬀside bed box

area.

Activating the System

The system has a shutdown feature that can be

used when the vehicle is in storage. This allows

the leisure electronics to be turned oﬀ when not

required to save battery power. When in the oﬀ

state the alarm and tracking system supplies are

still active, all other supplies are turned oﬀ.

Before using the system, please ensure the

system shutdown switch is in the on position

(button in) the system is now active.

Connecting to the Mains 230V supply and

Safety checks

For your safety it is IMPORTANT that you follow

these connections instructions each time

your Leisure Vehicle is connected to a mains

supply. This section assumes that the system

is complete and that a Leisure battery has been

installed (see 3.4).

A) Ensure suitability of the Mains Supply.

Your Leisure Vehicle should only be connected

to an approved supply that meets the

requirements of BS7671 or relevant harmonised

standards. In most cases the site warden will

hold information regarding suitability of supply.

If using a generator, you also need to comply

with the requirements / instructions supplied

with the generator. Please note that some

electronic generators may not be compatible

with your leisure system. Further generator

operational information is contained in section

3.2.

B) Switch the PSU Battery Charger / Power

Converter OFF.

Locate the green ‘Charger’ power switch on the

PSU and ensure the switch is in the oﬀ position

(button out) before connection to the mains

supply.

C) Connect the Hook-up Lead.

Firstly, connect the supplied hook-up lead

(orange cable with blue connectors) to the

Leisure Vehicle and then connect to the mains

supply.

D) Check Residual Current Device operation.

Locate the RCD within the PSU and ensure the

RCD is switched on (lever in up position). Press

the ‘Test’ button and conﬁrm that the RCD turns

oﬀ (lever in down position). Switch the RCD

back to the on position (lever in up position). If

the test button failed to operate the RCD see

section 3.1.

E) Check Miniature Circuit Breakers

Locate the MCB’s within the PSU (adjacent to

the RCD) and ensure they are all in the on (up)

position. If any MCB’s fail to ‘latch’ in the on

position see section 3.1.

F) Turn the PSU ON.

Locate the black ‘Shutdown’ button and ensure

it is in the on position (press button in). Locate

the green ‘Charger’ switch on the PSU and turn

to the on position (press button in). The charger

switch will illuminate when turned on.

G) Check correct Polarity.

Locate the ‘Reverse polarity’ indicator on

the PSU and ensure that the indicator is NOT

illuminated. If the indicator is illuminated see

section 3.2.

H) Check operation of equipment.

It is now safe to operate the 12V and 230V

equipment.

Operation while driving

The power control system is designed to

shutdown parts of the system while the engine

is running. This is to meet Electro Magnetic

Compatibility (EMC) regulations and to ensure

the safe operation of the motorhome. With

the engine running the control panel will ﬂash

the leisure battery and vehicle battery LEDs to

indicate that the batteries are being charged.

Please ensure the system shutdown switch

on the PSU is in the on (button in) position

before driving (see 2.2). This will ensure the

electronic system is active and will therefore be

able to control the charging process, supply the

refrigerator and monitor other system circuits.

If / when ﬁtted, designated 12V sockets, en-

route reading lights and en-route heating will

remain operational while the engine is running.

ELECTRICS

8.3 EC400 + Control Panel Component

Layout

Your control panel will have an appearance as

below, but depending on your speciﬁcation of

the vehicle the control panel features will vary.

Not all features are present in all vehicles.

Power Button. Press the power button to turn the leisure power on. Press

the button again to turn the power oﬀ. The adjacent indicator will illuminate

when the power is on, and also the voltage of the selected battery will be

displayed on the voltage gauge.

Pump Button. With the power on, press the pump button to turn the water

pump on. Press the button again to turn the pump oﬀ. The adjacent indicator

will illuminate when the pump is on, and also the level of the water tank will

be displayed on the water gauge (if a tank with level sensor is ﬁtted)

View Levels Button. To display the battery voltage levels and the water tank

levels on the control panel gauges, press the levels button. The display

will remain illuminated for 10 seconds. It is possible to lock the display ‘on’

to allow continuous display. This can be achieved by pressing and holding

the view levels button for 2-3 seconds until you hear a beep. To turn this

locked feature oﬀ, either press and hold the view levels button again for 2-3

seconds or turn the power oﬀ and back on.

Leisure Battery Button. To select the Leisure battery as the source of power,

press the leisure battery select button. The Leisure battery indicator with

then illuminate, conﬁrming the selected battery. Note: By default, the leisure

battery is selected as the source of power (if no mains supply is available), or

as the battery to be charged (when a mains supply is available).

Control Panel - Key Features

EC463 Control Panel

ELECTRICS

Further information relating to the control panel features can be found in the following sections.

Vehicle Battery Button. To select the Vehicle battery as the source of power,

press the vehicle battery select button. The Vehicle battery indicator with then

illuminate, conﬁrming the selected battery.

Mains On Indicator. When connected to a 230V supply and the battery charger

is turned on this indicator will illuminate.

Charging when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is

running both the vehicle battery and the leisure battery indicators will ﬂash in

unison to indicate that they are connected together and are being charged by

the vehicle.

Internal Lights Button. With the power on, press the internal lights button to

turn the main lighting supply on or oﬀ.

Awning Light Button. With the power on, press the awning light button to turn

the awning light on or oﬀ.

Frost Protection Button (if ﬁtted). With the power on, press the frost protect

button to turn on the water tank heating system. The adjacent indicator will

illuminate to show that the tank heating system is on.

ELECTRICS

Warning When Type

Fresh water

level low

With pump turned on and fresh

water level low (less than 25% full)

Only available when an on-board

tank is ﬁtted

Audible beep and the Fresh gauge empty

indicator will ﬂash

(To cancel press Levels Button)

Waste water

level full

With pump turned on and waste

water level full.

Only available when an on-board

tank is ﬁtted

Audible beep and the Waste gauge empty

indicator will ﬂash

(To cancel press Levels Button)

Leisure battery

voltage low

With control panel power on and

leisure battery selected (as active

battery) and the voltage level falls

below 10V

Audible beep and the Leisure battery

gauge 10V indicator will ﬂash

(To cancel press Levels Button)

With control panel power on and

leisure battery selected (as active

battery) and the voltage level is

below 9V

Audible beep and Leisure battery gauge

10V indicator will ﬂash. If the warning is

not cancelled the control panel will be

turned oﬀ.

(To cancel press Levels Button)

Note: This is an emergency cut oﬀ level to protect the battery from severe

damage. You should not rely on this cut oﬀ level during normal operation, but

manage your power consumption to a discharge level of 11.5V or above.

This cut oﬀ only applies to power drawn from the battery by the leisure

equipment that is controlled by the control panel power switch; it will not

protect the battery from discharge by permanently connected equipment.

Leisure battery

voltage high

With control panel power on or oﬀ

and leisure battery is selected (as

active battery) and the voltage

level rises above 15V

Audible beep, the Leisure battery gauge

14V indicator will ﬂash, and the control

panel power will be turned oﬀ.

(To cancel remove the high voltage

source)

8.4 System Warnings

The system incorporates a number of warnings that are active at speciﬁc times. These are

summarised below, and also covered by relevant sections of this manual.

When a warning is active a warning box will appear on the control panel screen containing a

description of the warning along with an audible beeping sound.

ELECTRICS

Warning When Type

Vehicle battery

warnings

If the vehicle battery is selected instead of the leisure battery, then similar

warnings to those described above are applied to the vehicle battery. The

vehicle battery low warning level is 10.9V

Vehicle battery

warnings

If the vehicle battery is selected instead of the leisure battery, then similar

warnings to those described above are applied to the vehicle battery. The

vehicle battery low warning level is 10.9V

Engine running

When the engine is started the system power will be turned oﬀ

Engine running,

Step extended

Step extended and engine started Short warning beeps before the step is

automatically retracted

Step jammed or obstructed Continuous warning beeps

Engine running,

Mains lead

(hook-up

cable) still

connected /

plugged in

When the engine is started and the

mains cable is still plugged in and

the charger is switched on

Continuous warning beeps

8.5 Water System Operation

The control panel pump button operates the

internal (onboard) water pump.

The system also incorporates a separate

powered water inlet that can be used with an

external ﬁller pump to ﬁll the internal (onboard)

water tank.

The water tanks (fresh & waste) incorporate a

level warning feature to warn the user when the

fresh water level drops below 25% or when the

waste water level reaches 100%.

If the water pump power is turned on and the

fresh water level drops to below 25% a warning

beep will be heard and the fresh gauge empty

indicator will ﬂash. To cancel the warning, press

the levels button.

If the water pump power is turned on and the

waste water level rises to full (100%) a warning

beep will be heard and the waste gauge full

indicator will ﬂash. To cancel the warning, press

the levels button.

These warnings will not be repeated unless the

water pump power switch is turned oﬀ and on

again. This is to ensure the warning does not

become a nuisance.

8.6 Frost Protection Operation

(where ﬁtted)

On vehicles ﬁtted with water tank frost

protection, the control panel frost protect switch

can be used to turn the feature on or oﬀ.

With protection on, the system monitors the

external temperature and will control the tank

heaters accordingly. The heaters will switch on

at 4-5 Deg C and oﬀ at 8-10 Deg C. If the fresh

or waste water levels are less than 25% the

appropriate heater will be turned oﬀ to prevent

overheating or damage to the element.

8.7 Solar Charge Management

(where ﬁtted)

The Power Supply Unit incorporates a built-in

solar charge management feature, which will

control the input from a separate solar panel and

regulator. Depending on the charge state of the

batteries, the solar power will be directed to the

required battery, and continuously monitored

to ensure optimum operation. For this system

to operate intelligently, the shutdown button

should be left switched on. If the shutdown

button is turned oﬀ then the solar panel will

charge the vehicle battery only.

ELECTRICS

8.8 Smart Charging

The Power Supply Unit incorporates a smart

charge feature, which monitors both leisure and

vehicle batteries and automatically adjusts and

directs the charger power (and solar power if a

solar panel is installed) to maintain the leisure

and vehicle batteries at an optimal level.

iNote: If the vehicle battery is isolated using

the Fiat ignition key isolator or similar, some

smart charging functionality will be lost, and

the available charge will be directed to the

leisure battery.

8.9 Electric Step Operation (where

ﬁtted)

On vehicles ﬁtted with an electric step, this is

operated by a button near the entry door. Press

and release the button to move the step in or

out. One press of the button will move the step

out; a further press will move the step in again.

If the engine is started the step will move in

automatically, after a short warning buzzer. If

this operation fails due to an obstacle a buzzer

will sound continuously to warn that the step is

still out, and therefore requires your attention.

ELECTRICS

MCB Rating Output Wire Colour Description

1 10 Amps White 230V Sockets

2 16 Amps White (Yellow for heater) Extra 230V Sockets / Heating System

3 10 Amps Black (Blue for Whale

water heater)

Fridge / Charger / Auxiliary devices / Whale

Water Heater

8.10 System Technical Information

The following section provides further technical

information relating to the electrical system.

You can also access the supporting technical

manual from www.sargentltd.co.uk

Residual Current Device & Miniature Circuit

Breakers

The Residual Current Device (RCD) is basically

provided to protect the user from lethal electric

shock. The RCD will turn oﬀ (trip) if the current

ﬂowing in the live conductor does not fully

return down the neutral conductor, i.e. some

current is passing through a person down to

earth or through a faulty appliance.

To ensure the RCD is working correctly, the test

button should be operated each time the vehicle

is connected to the mains supply (see section

2.3)

The Miniature Circuit Breakers

(MCB’s) operate in a similar way to traditional

fuses and are provided to protect the wiring

installation from overload or short circuit. If

an overload occurs the MCB will switch oﬀ the

supply. If this occurs you should investigate

the cause of the fault before switching the MCB

back on.

The following table shows the rating and circuit allocation for the three MCB’s

ELECTRICS

8.11 Generator Usage

Caution should be used before connecting a

generator to your motorhome.

WARNING: Never start or stop the

generator while electrical loads are connected

and switched on. Start the engine, let it

stabilise and then connect the electrical load.

When stopping the generator, disconnect the

electrical load and let engine stabilise before

switching oﬀ.

Whilst some generators use electronic inverter

technology, others use a more basic principle to

generate the 230V supply. Preference should

be to choose a generator which produces a

consistent sinusoidal wave form with accurate

voltage control.

The Reverse Polarity warning light on the PSU

may illuminate when using a Generator. This is

a normal side eﬀect when using some types of

generator. Instead of connecting the neutral

conductor to earth, some generators centre-tap

the earth connection making both neutral and

live conductors 110V above earth. This 110V

diﬀerence causes the neon polarity indicator to

illuminate.

In most cases it is safe to use a generator, but

please consult the generator handbook for

further information.

8.12 Battery Charger

The system incorporates an intelligent three-

stage battery charger.

During stage 1 the battery voltage is increased

gradually while the current is limited to start the

charging process and protect the battery. At

stage 2 the voltage rises to 14.4V to deliver the

bulk charge to the battery. When the battery

is charged, the voltage is decreased at stage

3 to 13.6V to deliver a ﬂoat charge to maintain

the battery in the fully charged state. The

charger can be left switched on continuously as

required.

The battery charger / power converter also

provides power to the leisure equipment when

the mains supply is connected. This module

supplies DC to the leisure equipment up to a

maximum of 25 Amps (300 Watts), therefore

the available power is distributed between the

leisure load and the battery, with the leisure load

taking priority as per the following example:

Leisure

Load

Available power for battery

charging

5A 20A

10A 15A

15A 10A

20A 5A

WARNING: Under heavy loads the Battery

Charger case may become hot. ALWAYS

ensure the ventilation slots have a clear ﬂow of

air. Do not place combustible materials against

/ adjacent to the charger.

ELECTRICS

8.13 Leisure Battery

A) Type / Selection

For optimum performance and safety, it is

essential that only a proprietary brand LEISURE

battery is used and it is suggested to select a

battery from the NCC Veriﬁed Battery Scheme

with a typical capacity of 75 to 120 Ah

(Ampere / hours). Depending on the

prospective use of the vehicle, the correct type

should be selected (A, B or C, according to the

NCC Veriﬁed Battery Scheme). A normal car

battery is NOT suitable. This battery should

always be connected when the system is in use.

The PSU is conﬁgured to work with standard

lead acid leisure batteries, and in most cases

is also compatible with the latest range of

Absorbed Glass Matt (AGM) batteries. The

system is also suitable for Lithium batteries with

built-in Battery Management Systems BMS.

Before ﬁtting non-standard batteries, please

check that the charging proﬁle described in 3.3

is suitable for the type of battery by referring

to the battery documentation or battery

manufacturer.

Some vehicle installations can cater for two

leisure batteries connected in parallel. In these

cases, it is recommended that two identical

batteries are used.

The battery feed is ﬁtted with an inline fuse

between the battery and the electrical harness,

and is usually located immediately outside the

battery compartment or within 500mm of the

battery. The maximum rating of this fuse is 40A

per battery.

B) Installation & Removal

Always disconnect the 230V mains supply

and turn the PSU green charger switch to the

oﬀ position (button out) before removing or

installing the battery.

When connecting the battery, ensure that the

correct polarity is observed (black is negative

[-] and red is positive [+]) and that the terminals

are securely fastened. Crocodile clips must not

be used.

WARNING: Explosive gases may be

present at the battery. Take care to prevent

ﬂames and sparks in the vicinity of the battery

and do not smoke.

C) Operation / Servicing

Under normal circumstances it should not be

necessary to remove the battery other than for

routine inspection of the terminals and “topping

up” of the battery ﬂuid where applicable. Please

see instructions supplied with the battery.

iNote: Do not over discharge the battery.

One of the most common causes of battery

failure is when the battery is discharged below

the recommended level of approximately 10V.

Discharging a battery below this ﬁgure can

cause permanent damage to one or more of

the cells within the battery.

To prevent over discharge, the power control

system incorporates a battery protect circuit

that warns the users and then disconnects the

batteries when they fall below set values.

If a warning is active a beep will be emitted by

the control panel. To cancel the warning, press

the Levels Button. These warnings will not be

repeated unless the power switch is turned oﬀ

and on again. This is to ensure the warning does

not become a nuisance.

ELECTRICS

Battery Voltage

cut oﬀ

Action after

cut oﬀ

Notes

Vehicle 10.9V Battery selection is

changed from Vehicle

battery to Leisure

battery. If the leisure

battery is below 9V then

a further warning will

occur (see below).

This cut oﬀ level is designed to protect the

vehicle battery from over discharge. The

10.9V level ensures there is suﬃcient power in

the battery to run the vehicle electronics and

start the vehicle. This cut oﬀ only applies to

power drawn from the battery by the leisure

equipment; it will not protect the battery if you

leave vehicle circuits switched on, such as the

road lights.

Leisure 9V Power is turned oﬀ This is an emergency cut oﬀ level to protect

the battery from severe damage. You

should not rely on this cut oﬀ level during

normal operation, but manage your power

consumption to a discharge level of about

11.5V.

This cut oﬀ only applies to power drawn from

the battery by the leisure equipment that is

controlled by the control panel power switch;

it will not protect the battery from discharge

by permanently connected equipment.

ELECTRICS

Fuse Rating Fuse

Colour

Description

Battery 1 40 Amps Orange Fuse remotely located near battery

Battery 2 40 Amps Orange Fuse remotely located near battery 2 (where ﬁtted)

8.14 12 Volt DC Fuses

WARNING: When replacing fuses always replace a fuse with the correct value. NEVER replace

with a higher value / rating as this could damage the wiring harness. If a replacement fuse ‘blows’

do not keep replacing the fuse as you could damage the wiring harness. Please investigate the

fault and contact your dealer.

Fuse Rating Fuse Colour Description

1 25 Amps White Battery Charger

2 7.5 Amps Brown Fridge Controls / Alarm

3 10 Amps Red 12V & USB Sockets / TV Amp

4 10 Amps Red Extractor, Cooker hood, Heki powered skylight. Alde or Truma

Combi Heating (Not En-Route), Whale Water Heater

5 10 Amps Red Appliances, Cooker, Toilet, Whale Space Heater, Locker

Mount USB, Tank Valves

6 10 Amps Red Water Pumps / Tank Heaters

7 7.5 Amps Brown Main lighting (not including spotlights with USB), Rear

ambient lighting, Oﬀside awning light

8 7.5 Amps Brown Entry lights, Front ambient lighting

9 10 Amps Red Alde or Truma En-Route Heating, Marker Lights, En-Route

lighting, 12V Sockets, WiFi & Satellite supply

10 10 Amps Red Awning Light (Doorside) / Electric Step

11 15 Amps /

20 Amps

Blue/Yellow Fridge 12V: 15A for undercounter fridge, 20A for tall fridge

freezer

12 15 Amps Blue Towing 12V

13 15 Amps /

20 Amps

Blue/Yellow Fridge D+: 15A for undercounter fridge, 20A for tall fridge

freezer

The following table shows the fuse allocation for the 13 fuses ﬁtted to the PSU. Please note that fuses

are dependant on PSU versions, so not all fuses may be present.

iNote: Fuses (2-13) have a Red LED below them which provides indication that the fuse has

blown. The charger fuse has a green LED which Indicates that the charger is working.

ELECTRICS

Fault Possible Cause Proposed Fix

No 230 Volt

output from

PSU

Connecting lead between the site

and Leisure Vehicle not connected

Check and connect lead as per 2.3C

RCD switched oﬀ Reset RCD as per 2.3D

RCD not operating correctly Check supply polarity; if the RCD

continues to fail contact your Dealer as

there is probably an equipment or wiring

fault.

MCB switched oﬀ Reset MCB by switching OFF (down

position) then back ON (up position), if

the MCB continues to fail contact your

Dealer as there is probably an equipment

or wiring fault.

No or deﬁcient supply from site Contact site Warden for assistance.

Another fault Contact your Dealer

Reverse

Polarity light is

illuminated on

PSU

Mains Supply reversed? The reverse polarity light is designed

to illuminate when the Live and Neutral

supply has been reversed / crossed

over. If the light illuminates there is a

problem with the site supply or the cable

connecting the supply to your vehicle. The

light is designed to work on UK electrical

supplies (where the neutral conductor

is connected to earth at the substation).

If you are using your vehicle outside the

UK this light may illuminate when no fault

exists. In these cases, consult the site

warden for advice.

Generator being used ‘The Reverse Polarity warning light is on

when using my Generator’.

This is a normal side eﬀect when using

some types of generator. Instead of

connecting the neutral conductor to

earth, some generators centre-tap the

earth connection making both neutral and

live conductors 110V above earth. This

110V diﬀerence causes the neon polarity

indicator to illuminate. In most cases it is

still safe to use the generator, but please

consult the generator handbook for

further information.

8.15 Common Fault Table

ELECTRICS

Fault Possible Cause Proposed Fix

Control Panel

Problems

Control Panel has no display Check batteries and fuses, turn PSU

isolate switch and charger switch on and

ensure mains supply is connected.

Check control panel connecting lead at

PSU and behind Control Panel.

Contact your Dealer.

12V Power turns oﬀ Battery protect feature has operated to

protect the Vehicle battery and or the

Leisure battery. See 3.4C

Over voltage protection has been

activated, control panel is beeping, 14V

LED is ﬂashing (leisure or vehicle). A

number of things can cause this but

the most common is the solar panel,

it is worth checking the regulator is

connected correctly and operating within

the correct parameters.

Engine has been started; all equipment

has been disconnected to meet EMC

requirements. See 2.4

Control Panel locked / erratic

function

Observe control panel handling

instructions.

Control panel software may have

crashed. Reboot control panel by turning

oﬀ the PSU isolate switch. Wait 30

seconds then turn the switch back on.

Check with your dealer that your system

has the latest software installed, as an

update may be available.

No 12 volt

output from

PSU

No 230V supply Check all above

Charger not switched on Turn charger switch on, switch will

illuminate

Battery not connected and / or

charged

Install charged battery as per 3.4

Power button on control panel not

switched to on

Turn power on at control panel

Battery ﬂat / Battery fuse blown Recharge battery, check fuses, check

charging voltage is present at battery.

Fuse blown Check all fuses are intact and the correct

value fuse is installed as per fuse table.

Equipment switched oﬀ /

unplugged

Check equipment is switched on and

connected to the 12V supply

Other fault Contact your Dealer

ELECTRICS

Fault Possible Cause Proposed Fix

Pump not

working

Fuse blown Replace fuse with correct value as per

fuse table

Pump turned oﬀ Turn pump on by pressing the pump

button at the control panel

Lights not

working

Fuse/s blown Replace fuse with correct value as per

fuse table.

Lights turned oﬀ Turn Lights on by pressing the lights

button, use dimmer at the control panel.

8.16 Contact details

Sargent Electrical Services Limited provide a

technical help line during oﬃce hours. Please

contact 01482 678981 if you require technical

help.

For out of hour support please refer to the

support section of the Sargent web site

www.sargentltd.co.uk

ELECTRICS

Outline Speciﬁcation

Input 230V 230 Volts / 0 to 16 Amps + / - 10%

Output 230V

RCD protected, 2 x MCB outputs of 10A & 1 x MCB

output of 16A

Separate switched channels for heating system and

charger

Input 12V 2 x 20A battery inputs via 2 x 4-way connectors

Solar Input

1 x Dedicated solar panel input capable of supporting

10A of solar power input (typically 180 to 200W) via a

2-way connector

Check the solar panel

rating plate to ensure

the maximum current is

<= 10A

Output 12V

25A total output via multiple switched channels

protected by 13 fused outputs

Battery Charger

Input 220-240 Volts AC +/- 10%, Frequency 50 Hz +/-

6%, Current 3A max.

DC Output 13.6 to 14.4 Volts nominal, Current 25

Amps max (300 Watts).

Signal Input

4 x Fresh water level, 4 x Waste water level, 1 x

Engine running, plus multiple vehicle connections,

sensor inputs for temperature & humidity

Fresh water negative

sensed Waste water

negative sensed

Data In / Out

CANBUS Data communication and power to

Control Panel via 6 way connector CI-Bus Data

communication to CI-Bus enabled devices via

RJ11/12 connector

IP rating IP31

Operating

temperature

Ambient 0 to 35° Celsius Charger case temperature

with full load 65° C Max

Automatic shutdown

and restart if

overheated /overloaded

Dimensions

EC454PSU,

EC456PSU

Power Supply

Unit

Overall size (HxWxD) 180 x 305 x 135mm Clearances

75mm above, 50mm left & right

Weight 3.8 Kg

EC463 Control

Panel

Overall size (HxWxD) 87 x 250 x 15mm Cut-out size

(HxWa) 70 x 233mm

Fixing centres

130*75mm Weight

114 g

8.17 Technical Data

Equipment – EC652, EC653, EC800, EC635 & PX300

ELECTRICS

8.18 Approvals

System: BSEN 1648-1, BSEN1648-2 compliant,

BS7671: 2018 compliant

Residual Current Device: RCD 40A 30mA trip to

BS EN 61008

Miniature Circuit Breakers: MCB’s type C 4500A

breaking capacity to BSEN 60898

Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) directive

2014/30/EU Certiﬁcate CE20071224-1

Battery Charger: BS EN 60335-2.29

CB, UL60950-1 Approved, IEC61000-4-

2,3,3,4,5,6,8,11, EN55024, Light industry

level, Criteria A, EN55022 (CISPR22) Class B,

EN61000-3-2,3

Low Voltage Directive: 2014/35/EU TUV-

014900-A1

8.19 Declaration of Conformity

Equipment: Leisure Power Control System

Model name: EC454, EC463 CP, EC652, EC643,

EC800 CP & PX300

I hereby declare that the equipment named

above has been designed to comply with the

relevant sections of the above referenced

approvals. The unit complies with all essential

requirements of the Directives.

Signed Name Position Manufacturer

I L Sargent Managing Director Sargent Electrical Services Ltd

Unit 35, Tokenspire Business

Park Woodmansey, Beverley East

Yorkshire, United Kingdom

Date:

25/08/2021

Whilst every eﬀort has been made to ensure the

accuracy and completeness of this document, no

guarantee is given against errors or omissions.

This document may be updated / improved over

time therefore please check with your dealer /

supplier for update information or visit

www.sargentltd.co.uk

ELECTRICS

8.20 Swift Command Power Control

System (Kon-Tiki)

This section of the handbook will guide you

through the operation of the electrical system.

All details are correct at the time of going to

press. Please also see the online version which

will include any later updates or amendments.

Further technical details are contained in

section 3 or in the supporting technical manual

available from www.sargentltd.co.uk

For the safe operation of all electrical

equipment within your Leisure Vehicle it is

important that you read and fully understand

these instructions. If you are unsure of any

point please contact your dealer / distributor for

advice before use.

The system has a number of key components

that you will need to be familiar with before

attempting to use the system, these are:

• The EC652 or EC653 Power Supply Unit (PSU)

is a combined mains consumer unit and 12V

controller usually located in a storage area

(lower bed box, wardrobe or similar).

• The control panel is used to turn circuits on

and oﬀ and to display battery, water tank and

other system information.

• The EC800 control panel uses a graphical

touchscreen.

• The PX300 Intelligent Battery charger 300W.

Fig 1

ELECTRICS

8.21 Control System Operation

Power Supply Unit - Component

Layout (see image on previous page)

The PSU is located in the lower bed box,

wardrobe or similar area.

Activating the System

The system has a shutdown feature that can be

used when the vehicle is in storage. This allows

the leisure electronics to be turned oﬀ when not

required to save battery power. When in the oﬀ

state the alarm and tracking system supplies are

still active, all other supplies are turned oﬀ.

Before using the system please ensure the

system shutdown switch is in the on position

(button in) the system is now active.

iNote: if you plan to use the Swift Command

remote features the system needs to be active.

Connecting to the Mains 230V supply

and Safety checks

For your safety it is IMPORTANT that you follow

these connections instructions each time

your Leisure Vehicle is connected to a mains

supply. This section assumes that the system is

complete and that a Leisure battery has been

installed (see 3.4).

A) Ensure suitability of the Mains Supply.

Your Leisure Vehicle should only be connected

to an approved supply that meets the

requirements of BS7671 or relevant harmonised

standards. In most cases the site warden will

hold information regarding suitability of supply.

If using a generator you also need to comply with

the requirements / instructions supplied with

the generator. Please note that some electronic

generators may not be compatible with your

leisure system. Further generator operational

information is contained in section 4.2.

B) Switch the PSU Battery Charger / Power

Converter OFF.

Locate the green ‘Charger’ power switch on the

PSU and ensure the switch is in the oﬀ position

(button out) before connection to the mains

supply.

C) Connect the Hook-up Lead.

Firstly connect the supplied hook-up lead

(orange cable with blue connectors) to the

Leisure Vehicle and then connect to the mains

supply.

D) Check Residual Current Device operation.

Locate the RCD within the PSU and ensure the

RCD is switched on (lever in up position). Press

the ‘Test’ button and conﬁrm that the RCD turns

oﬀ (lever in down position). Switch the RCD

back to the on position (lever in up position).

If the test button failed to operate the RCD see

section 3.1.

E) Check Miniature Circuit Breakers

Locate the MCB’s within the PSU (adjacent to

the RCD) and ensure they are all in the on (up)

position. If any MCB’s fail to ‘latch’ in the on

position see section 3.1

F) Turn the PSU ON.

Locate the black ‘Shutdown’ button and ensure

it is in the on position (press button in). Locate

the green ‘Charger’ switch on the PSU and turn

to the on position (press button in). The charger

switch will illuminate when turned on.

G) Check correct Polarity.

Locate the ‘Reverse polarity’ indicator on

the PSU and ensure that the indicator is NOT

illuminated. If the indicator is illuminated see

section 3.2.

H) Check operation of equipment. It is now safe

to operate the 12V and 230V equipment.

Operation while driving

The power control system is designed to

shutdown parts of the system while the engine

is running. This is to meet Electro Magnetic

Compatibility (EMC) regulations and to ensure

the safe operation of the motorhome. With the

engine running the screen will show a warning

‘ENGINE RUNNING’.

Please ensure the system shutdown switch

on the PSU is in the on (button in) position

before driving (see 2.2). This will ensure the

electronic system is active and will therefore be

able to control the charging process, supply the

refrigerator and monitor other system circuits.

If / when ﬁtted, designated 12V sockets, enroute

reading lights and en-route heating will remain

operational while the engine is running.

ELECTRICS

8.22 EC800 Control Panel

Component Layout (see image below)

Your control panel will have an appearance as

below, but depending on your speciﬁcation of the

vehicle the control panel features will vary. Not all

features are present in all vehicles.

‘Swift’ Power Button. Press the ‘Swift’ power button to turn the leisure power on, the

panel will beep twice and show the Swift start-up logo. The control panel screen will

illuminate when the power is on, but the screen will go to sleep after a pre-determined

time. Pressing the power button or touching the screen while the screen is asleep will

wake the screen without turning the power on or oﬀ. To turn the power oﬀ press and

hold the power button to turn the power oﬀ, the panel will beep once.

Pump Button. Press the pump button to turn the water pump on. Press the button

again to turn the pump oﬀ. The button border will illuminate when the pump is on. To

view the water tank levels and other controls press the water button.

Awning Light Button. Press the awning light button to turn the awning light on or oﬀ.

The border of the button will illuminate when the awning light is on. Note the awning

light may also be controlled by the motorhome locking system.

Lighting Button. Press the lighting button to show the lighting control screen. Here

you can turn on / oﬀ or adjust the dimmable lighting levels. Press the home button to

return to the main screen.

EC800 Control Panel - Key Features

ELECTRICS

EC800 Control Panel ‘Header’ Information

At the top of the control panel screen there is a header or information bar which remains visible on all

screens. This is designed to provide quick reference information available at all times

* When a battery is not being charged a % remaining ﬁgure will be displayed. This ﬁgure is calculated from the battery voltage and

therefore should be used for guidance only.

Power Button. Press the power button to show the power information and

control screen. Here you can view battery levels, view charger and solar

current and press the more button (right arrow) to view 230V current. Press

the home button to return to the main screen.

Water Button. Press the water button to show the water tank information and

control screen. Here you can view tank levels and control related features.

Press the home button to return to the main screen.

Heating Button. Press the heating button to show the heating control screen.

Here you can control the heating system, select energy and temperature and

by pressing the more button (right arrow) you can set related timers. Press the

home button to return to the main screen.

Air-Conditioning Button. Press the Aircon button to show the aircon control

screen. Here you can select the operating mode, set the target temperature

and adjust the fan speed. Press the home button to return to the main screen.

Note: this button will only be visible if a CI-Bus equipped air conditioner is

installed, connected and enabled within the system.

Fridge Button. Press the ﬁdge button to show the fridge control screen.

Here you can select the operating mode, set the cooling setting and view the

temperature status. Press the home button to return to the main screen.

Settings Button. Press the settings button to show the general settings screen.

Here you can set the date & time, screen brightness and screen on time. There

are also buttons on this screen to pair a Bluetooth device, delete Bluetooth

devices, or turn the key beep on / oﬀ. Press the home button to return to the

main screen.

Internal and

external

temperature in

degrees Celsius

The internal

temperature is

shown inside the

vehicle symbol.

Relative humidity

range

1 to 100%

Current date Current time *Leisure battery

status

Green = good,

Orange = fair, Red

= poor. Lightning

symbol indicates

charging from

the 230V battery

charger. *Vehicle

*Vehicle

battery status

Green = good,

Orange = fair,

Red = poor. Sun

symbol indicates

charging from the

solar panel.

ELECTRICS

Temperature Readings

The system uses two sensors to measure

internal temperature and humidity, and external

temperature. The internal temperature and

humidity sensor is furniture mounted within

the motorhome, and the external sensor is

mounted below the motorhome ﬂoor. The

ﬁgures displayed are for information only, and

it is hoped the information will be useful, for

example when checking temperatures remotely

during cold weather.

For vehicles ﬁtted with Alde or Truma heating

systems, this sensor is not used to control the

heating temperature as it is measured above

the door by the Alde or Truma room sensor.

The readings on the heating system may vary

relative to the one shown on the control panel.

Water System Operation

The control panel pump button operates the

internal water pump drawing water from an on-

board water tank.

The water tanks (fresh & waste) incorporate

a level warning feature to warn the user when

the fresh water level drops below 25% or when

the waste water level reaches 100%. These

warnings can be enabled / disabled on the

control panel water screen.

If the water pump power is turned on and the

fresh water level drops to below 25% a warning

beep will be heard and a message will be

displayed on the control panel. To cancel the

warning, press the conﬁrm button.

If the water pump power is turned on and the

waste water level rises to full (100%) a warning

beep will be heard and a message will be

displayed on the control panel. To cancel the

warning, press the conﬁrm button.

These warnings will not be repeated unless the

water pump power switch is turned oﬀ and on

again. This is to ensure the warning does not

become a nuisance.

ELECTRICS

Water Tank Heaters (frost

protection) Operation

The EC652/653 features the ability to switch on

water tank heater to provide frost protection for

the fresh and waste tanks. The tank heaters will

only operate if there is over 25% in the relevant

water tank and the external temperature sensor

detects that the temperature falls below 2

degrees C. If the temperature rises above this

level the heaters will be switched oﬀ but the

feature will remain on.

If the tank heaters are turned on before starting

a journey, when the engine is started the tank

heaters will remain on for the duration of the

journey. When the engine is stopped the tank

heaters will remain on for a further 15 minutes.

If the engine is restarted within this 15 minute

period the tank heaters will remain on, again for

the duration of the journey.

When the engine is stopped the tank heaters will

turn oﬀ after a 15 minute period. To turn them

back on you will need to turn the control panel

on and then use the tank heaters button on the

water screen.

EC800 Water Tank Screen

Here you can view the on-board water tank

levels and control water tank related features.

Tank Heaters

Press the tank heaters button to turn on / oﬀ the water tank

heaters.

Level Alerts

Press the level alerts button turn on / oﬀ the water tank empty

/ full warnings.

Frost Alerts

Press the frost alerts button turn on / oﬀ the frost warnings.

Empty Fresh

Press this button to empty the fresh water tank (the press is

followed by a conﬁrm button to avoid accidental operation)

Empty Waste

Press this button to empty the waste water tank (the press is

followed by a conﬁrm button to avoid accidental operation)

iNote: Tank valves are normally closed and

will automatically close if the power is switched

oﬀ or if they have been open for more than 10

minutes.

iNote: When either tank is emptying the level

gauge and the related button will ﬂash. Press

the empty button again and conﬁrm if you wish

to cancel the emptying process.

iNote: Tank levels are measured in

increments of 25%

iNote: For fault ﬁnding please refer to the

water level sensor and cleaning page in the

services section

ELECTRICS

Lighting & Dimming Operation

The system contains up to two dimming

channels for groups of lights which can be

dimmed, turned on and turned oﬀ by this screen,

and can also be turned on and oﬀ by furniture

mounted switches.

The awning light on a motorhome can again

be controlled by a number of items, the control

panel awning light button, the App and the

lock and unlock system (dependant on system

setting being set to do so). Each item can toggle

the light on or oﬀ.

The Swift Command App can be used to both

conﬁgure and adjust the lighting and dimming.

EC800 Lighting Screen

Here you can turn on / oﬀ or adjust the

dimmable lighting levels.

On / Oﬀ

Press the centre of either dial to turn the dimmer channel on

or oﬀ. In the oﬀ state the centre of the dial shows the word

OFF. In the on state the level value is shown.

Up/ Down

Press the (+) or (-) buttons to increase ordecrease the

dimming level.

Solar Charge Management

The EC652/653 PSU incorporates a built-in

solar charge management feature, which will

monitor the input from a separate solar panel

and regulator. The Solar Active symbol will be

displayed on the control panel when there is

an amount of energy available to charge the

battery.

The voltage and current produced from the

regulator can be viewed on the control panel

display by selecting the Power menu item.

Depending on the charge state of the batteries,

the solar power will be directed to the required

battery and continuously monitored to ensure

optimum operation.

Power Screen (12V)

Here you can view battery levels, view charger

and solar current and press the more button

(right arrow) to view 230V current.

Smart Charging

Selected Battery

Use the selected battery button to select which battery you

wish to use or charge with the 230V charger.

230V Charging

If a battery is being charged by the 230V charger a ‘lightning’

symbol will be shown below the dial and adjacent to the

relevant battery in the header area.

Solar Charging

If a battery is being charged by the solar panel a ‘sun’ symbol

will be shown below the dial and adjacent to the relevant

battery in the header area.

ELECTRICS

Selected Battery

Use the selected battery button to select which battery you

wish to use or charge with the 230V charger.

230V Charging

If a battery is being charged by the 230V charger a ‘lightning’

symbol will be shown below the dial and adjacent to the

relevant battery in the header area.

Solar Charging

If a battery is being charged by the solar panel a ‘sun’ symbol

will be shown below the dial and adjacent to the relevant

battery in the header area.

Leisure Dial

The leisure dial shows the voltage of the leisure battery. Press

the centre of the dial to change to showing the leisure battery

current (+ positive value is charging and - negative value is

discharging)

Vehicle Dial

The leisure dial shows the voltage of the leisure battery. Press

the centre of the dial to change to showing the leisure battery

current (+ positive value is charging and - negative value is

discharging)

Solar Dial

The solar dial shows the current being supplied to the system

from the solar panel (if ﬁtted).

The EC653/653 PSU incorporates a smart

charge feature, which monitors both leisure and

vehicle batteries and automatically adjusts and

directs the charger power (and solar power if a

solar panel is installed) to maintain the leisure

and vehicle batteries at an optimal level.

iNote: If the vehicle battery is isolated using

the Fiat ignition key isolator or similar, some

smart charging functionality will be lost, and

the available charge will be directed to the

leisure battery.

AC Current Limiter Operation

The power control system features a 230V

current monitoring system which allows

the mains hook up current to be displayed

on the control panel. The resolution of this

reading is 0.5A. A current limit setting can be

activated which if reached will switch oﬀ the

electric elements in the heating system (and

airconditioning if ﬁtted and enabled), until such

time as the current drops and the elements will

be switched back on.

An example of this is if a kettle was to be

operated whilst the heating was on and the

current limit was reached then the heater

electric element would be temporarily

switched oﬀ, when the kettle had boiled then

the heater element would be switched back on

automatically.

This feature is particularly useful when abroad

on a low current supply. Setting the value to OFF

will disable this feature.

EC800 Power screen (230V)

Here you can view the 230V current and set the

230V current limiter.

AC Current

The dial on the left shows the 230V AC current being used by

the vehicle (from the site hook-up).

Set Limit

Press the centre of the dial to turn the AC current limiter on or

oﬀ. Press the (+) or (-) buttons to increase or decrease the

limit level. When on, the system will monitor the incoming

AC current and if the set limit is reached the 230V heating

element within the heating system will be temporarily turned

oﬀ until the current falls below the set limit.

iNote: For this feature to work correctly the

Heating mode must be set to Timer so that the

system can control the heating appliance.

ELECTRICS

EC800 Heating Controls

There are a number of heating systems that

can be controlled by the power control system.

The system will be preconﬁgured by the

manufacturer or supplying dealer. The related

control panel screens are shown below.

Heating screen

Here you can control the heating system, select

energy and temperature and by pressing the

more button (right arrow) you can set related

timers.

Mode

Set the mode to Manual to use the controls supplied by the

heating appliance manufacturer. Set the mode to Timer to

control the appliance by the EC800 control panel.

Note: The mode will automatically change

to App when you control the appliance by the

Swift Command app.

Status Temp Water

The status box shows you which timer is currently active, and

the temp and water boxes show the target room temperature

and water heater setting for the active timer.

Override

When operating in timer mode you can temporarily ‘override’

the timer room temperature by using the override feature.

Press the centre of the dial to turn the override on / oﬀ. Press

the (+) or (-) buttons to increase or decrease the required

emperature.

iNote: You can also override the room

temperature by making a change using

the appliance control panel (Alde & Truma

only). If you make a change the override

will automatically activate. The override

temperature will continue until the next timer

event time.

Truma CP+ Energy

The energy, gas or electric setting will vary depending on the

appliance type.

For Truma Combi+ heating press the energy button to step

through the available settings. Gas is indicated by the ﬂame

symbol and electric indicated by the lightning symbol.

Possible combinations are GAS, MIX1, MIX2, EL1 or EL2. One

electric symbol=1KW and two=2KW.

Alde 3030 Gas / Electric

For Alde 3030 heating system press the gas button to enable

or disable the use of gas. Press the electric button to step

through the available electric settings. Gas is indicated by the

ﬂame symbol and electric indicated by the lightning symbol.

Possible combinations are electric OFF, 1KW, 2KW or 3KW

and gas ON or OFF. One electric symbol=1KW, two=2KW and

three=3KW.

ELECTRICS

EC800 Refrigerator Controls

The main refrigerator settings can be set /

controlled by the EC800 control panel or the

Swift Command app. These controls work in

parallel with the ones on the fridge control

panel, so the settings cab be changed by either

method.

The related control anel sceens are shown

below.

For information in using the fridge from the Swift

Command app, please see the Swift Command

User Guide.

Fridge Screen. Here you can select the operating mode, set the cooling setting and view the

temperature status.

Mode Press mode button to select the required operating mode.

Select oﬀ to turn the fridge oﬀ.

Setting Use the setting (+) or (-) buttond to increase or decrease

the cooling setting. 1 is low and 5 is maximum

Temperature The temperature status display shows the temperature

state of the fridge, with the optimal (central) position

being the ideal. If the fridge is too warm, incease the

cooling setting to reduce the temperature. If the fridge is

too cold, reduce the cooling setting accordingly.

Note that the fridge will take time to react to a setting change so please allow suﬃcient time for the

status to update after changing a setting or adding food.

ELECTRICS

Air-conditioning

If your vehicle has been ﬁtted with a compatible

air-conditioning unit then the settings can be set

/ controlled by the EC800 control panel, the air-

conditioner infrared remote control or the Swift

Command app.

The unit must be turned on with its power switch

before it can be controlled. The related control

panel screens are shown below. For information

in using the airconditioning from the Swift

Command app, please see the Swift Command

User Guide

EC800 Air-conditioning screen

Here you can select the operating mode, set the

target temperature and adjust the fan speed.

Lights

Press the lights button to control the LED light built into the

air-conditioning unit. Select on or oﬀ to turn the light on or oﬀ,

or select dimmed to allow the light to be controlled with other

dimmable lighting in the vehicle.

Mode

Press mode button to select the required operating mode.

Select oﬀ to turn the airconditioner oﬀ. Note that available

modes vary according to the model of air-conditioner ﬁtted.

Temperature

Use the temperature setting (+) or (-) buttons to increase or

decrease the temperature setting. Available settings range

from 5 degrees to 30 degrees Celsius.

Fan Speed

Use the fan speed setting (+) or (-) buttons to increase or

decrease the fan setting.

Note that available settings vary according to the model of

air-conditioner ﬁtted.

EC800 Bluetooth Pairing & Other

Controls

The EC800 control panel can display the

software version number of the Control Panel,

the PSU and the communicator / tracking unit.

Press the settings button to view the setting

screen which contains the related information.

The Bluetooth pairing process is covered

below. Further help with Bluetooth pairing is

available in the form of a help video which can

be viewed on the Sargent website in the Support

Information section.

EC800 General settings screen

Here you can set the date & time, screen

brightness and screen on time.

Time, Date & Day

Press the (+) or (-) buttons above or below each item to

adjust the value. Note that the system uses the 24 hour clock.

Screen settings

Press on the screen brightness button to adjust the screen

backlight level. Press on the screen timeout button to select

the time that the screen will stay illuminated for after a press

or touch.

Bluetooth Pair

Press the pair button to start pairing with your compatible

Bluetooth device. The pair button border will illuminate when

pairing is active. You can now pair your device to the system

following the devices instructions. Pairing remains active for

1 minute and is then turned oﬀ automatically.

Bluetooth Delete

Press the delete button to delete any Bluetooth pairings from

the system.

Key Beep

Use the key beep button to turn on / oﬀ the beep sound when

a button is pressed.

iNote: Setting changes are saved when you

press the home button to return to the main

screen.

ELECTRICS

Electric Step Operation

On vehicles ﬁtted with an electric step, this is

operated by a button near the entry door. Press

and release the button to move the step in or

out. One press of the button will move the step

out; a further press will move the step in again.

If the engine is started the step will move in

automatically, after a short warning buzzer. If

this operation fails due to an obstacle a buzzer

will sound continuously to warn that the step is

still out, and therefore requires your attention.

ELECTRICS

8.23 System Warnings

The system incorporates a number of warnings that are active at speciﬁc times. These are

summarised below, and also covered by relevant sections of this manual.

When a warning is active a warning box will appear on the control panel screen containing a

description of the warning along with an audible beeping sound.

Warning When Type

Fresh water

level low

With pump turned on and fresh

water level low (less than 25% full)

Only available when an on-board

tank is ﬁtted.

Message on screen and 60 second

audible beep

Waste water

level full

With pump turned on and waste

water level full. Only available

when an on-board tank is ﬁtted

Message on screen and 60 second

audible beep

Leisure battery

voltage low

With control panel power on and

leisure battery selected (as active

battery) and the voltage level falls

below 10V

Message on screen and 60 second

audible beep

With control panel power on and

leisure battery selected (as active

battery) and the voltage level is

below 9

Message on screen and 60 second

audible beep. If no action taken after 30

seconds then the system will switch the

power oﬀ to prevent severe discharge of

the battery

Note: This is an emergency cut oﬀ level to protect the battery from severe

damage. You should not rely on this cut oﬀ level during normal operation, but

manage your power consumption to a discharge level of 11.5V or above. This

cut oﬀ only applies to power drawn from the battery by the leisure equipment

that is controlled by the control panel power switch; it will not protect the

battery from discharge by permanently connected equipment.

Leisure battery

voltage high

With control panel power on or oﬀ

and leisure battery is selected (as

active battery) and the voltage

level rises above 15V

Message on screen and repeated beeps

from the control panel. The power is

automatically turned oﬀ. The beeping will

not stop until the fault is cleared.

Vehicle battery

warnings

If the vehicle battery is selected instead of the leisure battery, then similar

warnings to those described above are applied to the vehicle battery. The

vehicle battery low warning level is 10.9V

Engine running When the engine is started the

system power will be turned oﬀ

Message on screen stating ‘engine

running’.

Step extended

Step extended and engine

started

Message on screen and warning buzzer

Step jammed or obstructed

100

ELECTRICS

Warning When Type

Mains lead

(hook-up

cable) still

connected /

plugged in

When the engine is started and the

mains cable is still plugged in and

the charger is switched on

Message on screen and repeated beeps

from the control panel. The beeping

will not stop until the hook-up lead is

removed.

Heating system When set to control the heating

system, the EC800 control panel

will show related heating system

warnings, which will include the

error number and error description

Message on screen and 60 second

audible beep. Additional descriptive

information is available when using the

Swift Command App.

Refrigerator /

Fridge Freezer

When set to control the

refrigerator, the EC800 control

panel will show related warnings

which will include the error number

and error description

Message on screen and 60 second

audible beep. Additional descriptive

information is available when using the

Swift Command App.

101

ELECTRICS

MCB Rating Output Wire Colour Description

1 10 Amps White 230V Sockets

2 16 Amps White (Yellow for heater) Extra 230V Sockets / Heating System

3 10 Amps Black (Blue for Whale

water heater)

Fridge / Charger / Auxiliary devices / Whale

Water Heater

8.24 System Technical Information

The following section provides further technical

information relating to the electrical system. You

can also access the supporting technical manual

from www.sargentltd.co.uk

Residual Current Device & Miniature

Circuit Breakers

The Residual Current Device (RCD) is basically

provided to protect the user from lethal electric

shock. The RCD will turn oﬀ (trip) if the current

ﬂowing in the live conductor does not fully

return down the neutral conductor, i.e. some

current is passing through a person down to

earth or through a faulty appliance.

To ensure the RCD is working correctly, the test

button should be operated each time the vehicle

is connected to the mains supply.

The Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB’s) operate

in a similar way to traditional fuses and are

provided to protect the wiring installation from

overload or short circuit. If an overload occurs

the MCB will switch oﬀ the supply. If this occurs

you should investigate the cause of the fault

before switching the MCB back on.

The following table shows the rating and circuit

allocation for the three MCB’s

Generator Usage

Caution should be used before connecting a

generator to your motorhome.

WARNING: Never start or stop the

generator while electrical loads are connected

and switched on. Start the engine, let it

stabilise and then connect the electrical load.

When stopping the generator, disconnect the

electrical load and let engine stabilise before

switching oﬀ.

Whilst some generators use electronic inverter

technology, others use a more basic principle

to generate the 230V supply. Preference should

be to choose a generator which produces a

consistent sinusoidal wave form with accurate

voltage control.

The Reverse Polarity warning light on the PSU

may illuminate when using a Generator. This

is a normal side eﬀect when using some types

of generator. Instead of connecting the neutral

conductor to earth, some generators centre tap

the earth connection making both neutral and

live conductors 110V above earth. This 110V

diﬀerence causes the neon polarity indicator to

illuminate.

In most cases it is safe to use a generator, but

please consult the generator handbook for

further information.

102

ELECTRICS

Battery Charger

The system incorporates an intelligent

threestage battery charger.

During stage 1 the battery voltage is increased

gradually while the current is limited to start

the charging process and protect the battery.

At stage 2 the voltage rises to 14.4V to deliver

the bulk charge to the battery. When the battery

is charged, the voltage is decreased at stage

3 to 13.6V to deliver a ﬂoat charge to maintain

the battery in the fully charged state. The

charger can be left switched on continuously as

required.

The battery charger / power converter also

provides power to the leisure equipment when

the mains supply is connected. This module

supplies DC to the leisure equipment up to a

maximum of 25 Amps (300 Watts), therefore

the available power is distributed between the

leisure load and the battery, with the leisure load

taking priority as per the following example:

Leisure

Load

Available power for battery

charging

5A 20A

10A 15A

15A 10A

20A 5A

WARNING: Under heavy loads the Battery

Charger case may become hot. ALWAYS

ensure the ventilation slots have a clear ﬂow of

air. Do not place combustible materials against

/ adjacent to the charger.

Leisure Battery

A) Type / Selection

For optimum performance and safety it is

essential that only a proprietary brand LEISURE

battery is used and it is suggested to select a

battery from the NCC Veriﬁed Battery Scheme

with a typical capacity of 75 to 120 Ah (Ampere /

hours). Depending on the prospective use of the

vehicle the correct type should be selected (A, B

or C). A normal car battery is NOT suitable. This

battery should always be connected when the

system is in use.

The PSU is conﬁgured to work with standard

lead acid leisure batteries, and in most cases

is also compatible with the latest range of

Absorbed Glass Matt (AGM) batteries. The

system is also suitable for Lithium batteries with

built-in Battery Management Systems BMS).

Before ﬁtting non-standard batteries please

check that the charging proﬁle described in 3.3

is suitable for the type of battery by referring

to the battery documentation or battery

manufacturer.

Some vehicle installations can cater for two

leisure batteries connected in parallel. In these

cases it is recommended that two identical

batteries are used.

The battery feed is ﬁtted with an inline fuse

between the battery and the electrical harness,

and is usually located immediately outside

the battery compartment or within 500mm of

the battery. The maximum rating of this fuse

is 20A per battery. If a single battery is ﬁtted

to a motorhome, this fuse could be up to 40A,

however if two batteries are ﬁtted each battery

should be fused at a maximum of 20A.

103

ELECTRICS

B) Installation & Removal

Always disconnect the 230V mains supply

and turn the PSU green charger switch to the

oﬀ position (button out) before removing or

installing the battery.

When connecting the battery, ensure that the

correct polarity is observed (black is negative

[-] and red is positive [+]) and that the terminals

are securely fastened. Crocodile clips must not

be used.

WARNING: Explosive gases may be

present at the battery. Take care to prevent

ﬂames and sparks in the vicinity of the battery

and do not smoke.

C) Operation / Servicing

Under normal circumstances it should not be

necessary to remove the battery other than for

routine inspection of the terminals and “topping

up” of the battery ﬂuid where applicable. Please

see instructions supplied with the battery.

iNote: Do not over discharge the battery.

One of the most common causes of battery

failure is when the battery is discharged below

the recommended level of approximately 10V.

Discharging a battery below this ﬁgure can

cause permanent damage to one or more of

the cells within the battery.

To prevent over discharge, the power control

system incorporates a battery protect circuit

that warns the users and then disconnects the

batteries when they fall below set values.

If a warning is active a beep will be emitted by

the control panel and information will be shown

on the screen. To cancel the warning, press

the select button. These warnings will not be

repeated unless the power switch is turned oﬀ

and on again. This is to ensure the warning does

not become a nuisance.

Battery Voltage

cut oﬀ

Action after

cut oﬀ

Notes

Vehicle 10.9V Battery selection is

changed from Vehicle

battery to Leisure

battery. If the leisure

battery is below 9V then

a further warning will

occur (see below).

This cut oﬀ level is designed to protect the

vehicle battery from over discharge. The 10.9V

level ensures there is suﬃcient power in the

battery to run the vehicle electronics and

start the vehicle. This cut oﬀ only applies to

power drawn from the battery by theleisure

equipment; it will not protect thebattery if you

leave vehicle circuits switched on, such as the

road lights.

Leisure 9V Power is turned oﬀ This is an emergency cut oﬀ level to protect

the battery from severe damage. You

should not rely on this cut oﬀ level during

normal operation, but manage your power

consumption to a discharge level of about

11.5V. This cut oﬀ only applies to power drawn

from the battery by the leisure equipment

that is controlled by the control panel

power switch; it will not protect the battery

from discharge by permanently connected

equipment.

104

ELECTRICS

12 Volt DC Fuses

WARNING: When replacing fuses

always replace a fuse with the correct value.

NEVER replace with a higher value / rating

as this could damage the wiring harness. If a

replacement fuse ‘blows’ do not keep replacing

the fuse as you could damage the wiring

harness. Please investigate the fault and

contact your dealer.

The following table shows the fuse allocation for the 13 fuses ﬁtted to the PSU. Please note that fuses

are dependant on PSU versions, so not all fuses may be present.

Fuse Rating Fuse

Colour

Description

1 25 Amps White Battery Charger

2 7.5 Amps Brown Fridge Controls / Alarm

3 10 Amps Red 12V & USB Sockets / TV Amp

4 10 Amps Red Extractor, Cooker hood, Heki powered skylight. Aide or Truma Combi

Heating (Not En-Route), Whale Water Heater

5 10 Amps Red Appliances, Cooker, Toilet, Whale Space Heater, Locker Mount USB,

Tank Valves

6 10 Amps Red Water Pumps / Tank Heaters

7 7.5 Amps Brown Main lighting (not including spotlights with USB), Rear ambient

lighting, Oﬀside awning light

8 7.5 Amps Brown Entry lights, Front ambient lighting

9 10 Amps Red Aide or Truma En-Route Heating, Marker Lights, En-Route lighting,

12V Sockets, WiFi & Satellite supply

10 10 Amps Red Awning Light (Doorside) / Electric Step

11 15/20 Amps Blue/

Yellow

Fridge 12V: 15A for undercounter fridge, 20A for tall fridge freezer

12 15 Amps Blue Towing 12V

13 15/20

Amps

Blue/

Yellow

Fridge D+: 15A for undercounter fridge, 20A for tall fridge freezer

The following table shows details of the fuse(s) located at the Leisure battery.

Fuse Rating Fuse Colour Description

Battery 1 40 Amps White Fuse remotely located near battery

Battery 2 40 Amps Brown Fuse remotely located near battery 2 (where ﬁtted)

iNote: Fuses (2-13) have a Red LED below them which provides indication that the fuse has

blown. The charger fuse has a green LED which Indicates that the charger is working.

105

ELECTRICS

Fault Possible Cause Proposed Fix

No 230 volt

output from

PSU

Connecting lead between the site

and Leisure Vehicle not connected

Check and connect lead

RCD switched oﬀ Reset RCD

RCD not operating correctly Reset MCB by switching OFF (down

position) then back ON (up position), if

the MCB continues to fail contact your

Dealer as there is probably an equipment

or wiring fault.

No or deﬁcient supply from site Contact site Warden for assistance.

Other fault Contact your Dealer

Reverse

Polarity light is

illuminated on

PSU

Mains Supply reversed? The reverse polarity light is designed

to illuminate when the Live and Neutral

supply has been reversed / crossed

over. If the light illuminates there is a

problem with the site supply or the cable

connecting the supply to your vehicle. The

light is designed to work on UK electrical

supplies (where the neutral conductor

is connected to earth at the sub station).

If you are using your vehicle outside the

UK this light may illuminate when no fault

exists. In these cases consult the site

warden for advice.

Generator being used ‘The Reverse Polarity warning light is on

when using my Generator’.

This is a normal side eﬀect when using

some types of generator. Instead of

connecting the neutral conductor to

earth, some generators centre tap the

earth connection making both neutral and

live conductors 110V above earth. This

110V diﬀerence causes the neon polarity

indicator to illuminate. In most cases it is

still safe to use the generator, but please

consult the generator handbook for

further information.

8.25 Common Fault Table

106

ELECTRICS

Fault Possible Cause Proposed Fix

Control Panel

Problems

Control Panel has no display Check batteries and fuses, turn PSU

isolate switch and charger switch on and

ensure mains supply is connected.

Check control panel connecting lead at

PSU and behind Control Panel.

Contact your Dealer.

12V Power turns oﬀ Battery protect feature has operated to

protect the Vehicle battery and or the

Leisure battery.

Over voltage protection has been

activated, the control panel will display

a warning. A number of things can cause

this but the most common is the solar

panel, it is worth checking the regulator is

connected correctly and operating within

the correct parameters.

Engine has been started, all equipment

has been disconnected to meet EMC

requirements.

Control Panel locked / erratic

function

Observe control panel handling

instructions. Control panel software may

have crashed. Reboot control panel by

turning oﬀ the PSU isolate switch. Wait

30 seconds then turn the switch back on.

Check with your dealer that your system

has the latest software installed, as an

update may be available.

No 12 volt

output from

PSU

No 230V supply Check all above

Charger not switched on Turn charger switch on, switch will

illuminate

Battery not connected and / or

charged

Install charged battery

Power button on control panel not

switched to on

Turn power on at control panel

Battery ﬂat / Battery fuse blown Recharge battery, check fuses, check

charging voltage is present at battery.

Fuse blown Check all fuses are intact and the correct

value fuse is installed as per fuse table.

Equipment switched oﬀ /

unplugged

Check equipment is switched on and

connected to the 12V supply

Other fault Contact your Dealer

107

ELECTRICS

Fault Possible Cause Proposed Fix

Pump not

working

Fuse blown Replace fuse with correct value as per

fuse table

Pump turned oﬀ Turn pump on by pressing the pump

button at the control panel

Comms not

working

Fuse/s blown Replace fuse with correct value as per

fuse table.

Lights turned oﬀ Turn Lights on by pressing the lights

button, use dimmer at the control panel.

Comms not

working

Bluetooth not paired Using System Settings menu, select

Bluetooth Pair option

Bluetooth not active on Device Ensure that the handheld device has

Bluetooth switched on and that the device

supports the Bluetooth 4 standard (BLE)

Bluetooth out of range Ensure the handheld device is within 7M

of the middle of the motorhome

Contact details

Sargent Electrical Services Limited provide a

technical help line during oﬃce hours. Please

contact 01482 678981 if you require technical

help.

For out of hour support please refer to the

support section of the Sargent web site

www.sargentltd.co.uk

108

ELECTRICS

8.26 Remote Access & Control

Swift Command App

The Swift Command app can be down loaded

from the Apple App Store or the Google Play

store.

A separate Swift Command User Guide is

available which covers the operation of the app.

Before you can use the App with your

motorhome you will need to create an account

and sign up to the free communication service.

This is a simple process and will be explained

further by your dealer at the vehicle handover.

Additional information is available at

www.swiftcommand.co.uk

Swift Command Web usage &

Description

In addition to the mobile App, you can also use

the same account and login details to access the

Swift Command web site.

Here you can update and amend your details,

look at location information and history, review

system information and historical data as well

as changing some system options and settings.

Swift Command SIM Coverage &

Usage information

The EC600 system contains Mobile SIM with

36 month contract, which commences upon

activation at the Dealership when your vehicle is

linked to your account.

Below is a list of the countries covered by the

SIM under a fair usage policy, a complete list is

available at request.

Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech

Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France,

Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland,

Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,

Luxembourg, Netherlands, Malta, Norway,

Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia,

Spain, Sweden, United Kingdom.

For vehicles shipping direct to Australia or New

Zealand a special world-wide SIM is ﬁtted at the

Swift factory.

Please note that if a UK speciﬁcation vehicle is

shipped to these countries the remote features

will not operate.

Replacement parts

The Control panel contains a small lithium

battery to maintain the clock when no other

energy supplies are available this will last in

excess of 5 years under normal conditions. The

battery is a CR2032 3.0V

The EC630 Communication module contains a

special backup battery pack which should last

in excess of 3 years under normal conditions.

The pack part number is 16308 available from

Sargent.

Updates

From time to time there may be updates to the

system ﬁrmware; these updates will be done at

service intervals by your dealership.

iNote:

Subscriptions:

Once the 3-year data subscription supplied

with your motorhome has expired, please

see www.swiftcommand.co.uk for renewal

details. The same website contains details

for the Tracking facility subscription, which is

purchased separately to the data subscription.

109

ELECTRICS

Outline Speciﬁcation

INPUT 230V 230 Volts / 0 to 16 Amps + / - 10%

OUTPUT 230V

RCD protected, 2 x MCB outputs of 10A & 1 x MCB

output of 16A

Separate switched channels for heating system and

charger

Turn pump on by

pressing the pump

button at the control

panel

INPUT 12V 2 x 20A battery inputs via 2 x 4 way connectors

SOLAR INPUT

1 X Dedicated solar panel input capable of supporting

10A of solar power input (typically 180 to 200W) via a

2 way connector

Check the solar panel

rating plate to ensure

the maximum current is

<= 10A

OUTPUT 12V

25A total output via multiple switched channels

protected by 13 fused outputs

Integrated

CHARGER

Input 220-240 Volts AC +/- 10%, Frequency 50 Hz +/-

6%, Current 3A max.

DC Output 13.6 to 14.4 Volts nominal, Current 25

Amps max (300 Watts).

Signal INPUT

4 x Fresh water level, 4 x Waste water level, 1 x

Engine running, plus multiple vehicle connections,

sensor inputs for temperature & humidity

Fresh water negative

sensed Waste water

negative sensed

Data IN / OUT

CANBUS Data communication and power to

Control Panel via 6 way connector CI-Bus Data

communication to CI-Bus enabled devices via

RJ11/12 connector

IP rating IP31

Operating

temperature

Ambient 0 to 35° Celsius Charger case temperature

with full load 65° C Max

Automatic shutdown

and restart if

overheated /

overloaded

Dimensions

EC601, EC602,

EC652 & EC653

PSU

Overall size (HxWxD) 180 x 305 x 135mm Clearances

75mm above, 50mm left & right

Weight 3.8 Kg

EC800 Control

Panel

Overall size (HxWxD) 125 x 279 x 25mm Cut-out size

(HxW) 108 x 173mm + switch area

Fixing centres 250mm X

74mm Weight 380g

EC635 Comms

Module

Overall size (HxWxD) 55 x 116 x 85mm Weight 550g

EC840 Sensor Overall size (HxWxD) 20 x 35 x 38mm Weight 10g

8.27 Technical Data & Approvals

Equipment – EC652, EC653, EC800, EC635 & PX300

110

ELECTRICS

Approvals

System: BSEN 1648-1, BSEN1648-2 compliant,

BS7671: 2018 compliant

Residual Current Device: RCD 40A 30mA trip to

BS EN 61008

Miniature Circuit Breakers: MCB’s type C 4500A

breaking capacity to BSEN 60898

Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) directive

2014/30/EU Certiﬁcate CE20071224-1

Battery Charger: BS EN 60335-2.29

CB, UL60950-1 Approved, IEC61000-4-

2,3,3,4,5,6,8,11, EN55024, Light industry

level, Criteria A, EN55022 (CISPR22) Class B,

EN61000-3-2,3

Low Voltage Directive: 2014/35/EU TUV-

014900-A1

Declaration of Conformity

Equipment: Leisure Power Control System

Model name: EC454, EC463 CP, EC652, EC643,

EC800 CP & PX300

I hereby declare that the equipment named

above has been designed to comply with the

relevant sections of the above referenced

approvals. The unit complies with all essential

requirements of the Directives.

Signed Name Position Manufacturer

I L Sargent Managing#

Director

Sargent Electrical Services Ltd

Unit 35, Tokenspire Business

Park Woodmansey, Beverley East

Yorkshire, United Kingdom

Date:

25/08/2021

Whilst every eﬀort has been made to ensure the

accuracy and completeness of this document, no

guarantee is given against errors or omissions.

This document may be updated / improved over

time therefore please check with your dealer /

supplier for update information or visit

www.sargentltd.co.uk

111

ELECTRICS

8.28 Motorhome battery

WARNING: Use precaution when removing

or replacing the battery, as batteries contain

acid liquids which can cause severe injuries

and damage when handled incorrectly. Refer

to the cleaning and maintenance section.

Please also take into consideration when

manoeuvring a battery, that the weight may be

in excess of 20kg.

Your motorhome has been ﬁtted with one or two

leisure batteries depending on size of vehicle

and expected electrical loads. The battery will

be housed in one of two ways:

Within a ﬂoor mounted compartment

Retained beneath the drivers seat or rear

seating

Floor mounted compartments are designed

to hold the battery securely and to contain any

electrolyte (acid) spillage. They are sealed from

the habitation compartment and a breather

pipe is ﬁtted to ensure any build up of explosive

gases (hydrogen) is vented to the outside. If a

breather pipe is ﬁtted it is important to ensure

that any replacement batteries are also ﬁtted

with a breather pipe. The battery or batteries

should only be positioned in the appropriate

compartment, and be properly secured before

travelling.

iNote: The batteries ﬁtted to your

motorhome in ﬂoor mounted compartments

must be kept upright.

When a leisure battery has been factory

installed below the driver’s seat or under a seat

base, the battery type used is speciﬁc to that

installation, and is of a type (Sealed AGM) that

allows a battery to be installed in a vertical or

horizontal orientation. Due to the construction

of this type of battery, it is not necessary to

vent the battery to the outside, and there is no

requirement to check and maintain electrolyte

levels.

WARNING: For your own safety, do not

store anything other than the leisure battery

in the battery compartment under the drivers

seat.

Battery removal

Step one

Remove the lower front seat fascia by pulling on

the clip feature located centrally on the upper

edge of the fascia. Using a small amount of

the force the fascia can be pulled in upwards

direction to fully detach it from the two lower

clip positions.

Step two

Release the battery harness by carefully

cutting the zip ties which are securing it to the

lower seat frame. Then disconnect the battery

harness connector by pulling ﬁrmly on each of

the large black connector plugs.

112

ELECTRICS

Step three

Remove the two fabric straps by loosening the

straps through the buckles.

Step four

Pull the battery forward out from under the seat

frame.

Step ﬁve

Carefully cut through the zip ties which are

securing the battery terminal covers in place

and remove the covers. Demount the battery

terminals using a 10mm spanner taking care not

to short the terminals.

Battery replacement

Step one

Place the new battery on the cab ﬂoor and

remount the battery terminals using a 10mm

spanner, taking care to observe the positive and

negative terminals. Reﬁt the terminal covers

and secure in place using new zip ties.

Step two

Ensuring that the buckle are face down. Feed

the two fabric straps under the lower front and

back bars. Hook the rear of the strap over the

front top bar – this will prevent the strap being

dragged backwards when sliding the battery

into place.

Step three

Lie the battery on its side with the terminals

closest to the ﬂoor. Slide the battery into

position taking care not to drag the straps

backward.

Step four

Reach up above the battery and up through the

centre of the seat base to draw the strap back

from the top bar. Now the strap is located on top

of the battery re-secure the straps through the

buckles.

113

ELECTRICS

Step ﬁve

Tighten the strap as far as possible then slide

the seat forward and passing the tails through

the hole in the seat base. Then fully tighten the

straps and place the tail straps under the seat

when fully tightened. Ensure that the straps

are located next to the battery terminals to limit

movement of the battery.

Step six

Reattached the battery harness by ﬁrmly

pushing the electrical connector back together,

stow cable and secure using zip ties across the

front the seat frame.

Step seven

Reattach the lower front seat fascia by pushing

into lower clip positions ﬁrst then rotating the

fascia until the upper central clip engages.

iNote: If an AGM battery is replaced, it must

be replaced by an equivalent AGM battery

which is suitable for a horizontal installation,

and does not require venting to the outside.

It is recommended that a good quality leisure

battery is always connected when the motor

home electrical system is in use. Leisure

batteries are a deep cycling rechargeable heavy

duty 12v battery designed to provide power for

lights and other electrical appliances. It should

be remembered that batteries suitable for the

electrical demands of a motorhome diﬀer in

design from those for use with a car, and whilst

the system may operate with a car battery it is

strongly recommended that only a rechargeable

leisure type battery, maintained in good

condition, is used. The battery should be kept

topped up (charged) at all times. If two leisure

batteries are ﬁtted additional care is needed,

as one battery deteriorates this can reduce the

lifespan of the other.

Replacement batteries should be a proprietary

brand leisure battery with a minimum 75Ah

capacity. Replacement batteries should be

checked dimensionally before purchasing, to

ensure ﬁtment within the battery compartment,

as brands vary in size.

WARNING: When connecting the battery,

ensure that the correct polarity is observed

(black is negative and red/brown is positive)

and that the terminals are securely fastened.

iNote: Any replacement of an auxiliary

battery shall be of the same type and

speciﬁcation as that originally ﬁtted or

speciﬁed by Swift.

WARNING: If your motorhome is ﬁtted

with Swift Command Tracker (by Sargent)

which monitors battery voltage. If you plan to

disconnect or remove your leisure battery for

maintenance or external charging, then please

contact the monitoring station before you

remove or disconnect the battery. If a leisure

battery is not ﬁtted, please also contact the

Tracker monitoring station before removing

the mains hook up. The Swift Command

Tracker monitoring station can be contacted

on 0345 6027302.

Under normal circumstances it should not be

necessary to remove the battery other than for

routine inspection of terminals and (for non-

AGM batteries) ‘topping up’.

WARNING: Explosive gases may be

present at the battery. Take care to prevent

ﬂames and sparks in the vicinity.

Your motorhome has been ﬁtted with an in-line

fuse between the battery terminal and the

power supply unit. Do not use a higher rated fuse

as this may cause damage to your motorhome.

WARNING: Switch oﬀ all appliances and

lamps before connecting or disconnecting

the battery. Open ﬂames and smoking are

prohibited around the battery compartment.

114

ELECTRICS

To preserve the life of your leisure battery and

charger please observe the following:

1. Do not leave all 12v lights powered at the

same time as this will drain your leisure

battery more rapidly.

2. If all 12v lights must be powered together,

ensure the battery is ‘in-circuit’ and that the

battery charger is turned on.

3. For optimum performance use the

transformer/charger unit with a leisure

battery attached.

4. Please note the auxiliary battery or batteries

supplied with your motorhome may not be

fully charged and should be charged for a

minimum of 24 hours before use. Battery

performance may be aﬀected by a number

of things such as ambient temperature, age,

state of charge etc.

Cleaning and maintenance (Driver and rear

seating mounted batteries (AGM) and ﬂoor

mounted battery components).

• Always remove the battery and the power

cable before carrying out any maintenance of

the product.

• Before removing the clamps switch oﬀ all

electrical and gas appliances.

• Use a soft cloth or sponge and a non-acid/

abrasive detergent when cleaning the battery

tray and area.

• Before the camping season or extensive

travelling, check the under seat area for wear

on ﬁtting and cables and replace if necessary.

• The cleaning of the battery area should only

be done after all power sources have been

switched oﬀ, in order to prevent a hazardous

situations.

115

ELECTRICS

8.29 Solar panel connection point or

Solar panel ﬁtment

Depending on speciﬁcation, a solar panel

connection point, or a solar panel and regulator,

may be installed in the motorhome.

Solar Panel Connection Point

If a connection point only is present, a solar

panel using this provision must provide a

fused and regulated output. From the provided

connection, the regulated output is taken to the

Power Supply Unit (PSU). This connection is

designed to be used with a maximum solar panel

size of up to 200W - if a solar panel or array of

greater than 200W is required, please contact

your dealer, Sargent Electrical or the Swift

Group for advice.

Solar panel installations should be undertaken

by trained technicians who are familiar with

the systems involved. Particular care should be

taken when making connections to solar panels,

which can generate high voltages ahead of a

regulator when exposed to light.

Motorhomes without factory ﬁt solar energy

systems will have a two way connector present

at a high level within furniture (i.e within

wardrobe, either visible or behind a removable

cover). The output from a regulator, rated to suit

the chosen solar panel, should be connected to

this point.

Factory ﬁtted Solar Energy System

Depending on speciﬁcation, your motorhome

may be ﬁtted with a solar panel of up to 200W,

and if a solar panel is ﬁtted then a suitable solar

regulator will also be installed. This solar panel

and regulator may provide additional 12V power

whenever sunlight is available to the panel, and

this will be directed to the PSU.

Regulator operation

The regulator operates automatically, turning on

and oﬀ as required to charge and operate. When

the solar panel is exposed to a source of sunlight

the regulator starts to operate, and the indictors

on the solar regulator will indicate the regulator

is operating. See the instructions supplied

with the regulator for the full description of

indications.

Control Panel

When the solar panel is operating the leisure

battery voltage display value on the control

panel may increase, however this does depend

on the amount of load placed on the system and

the amount of power being generated by the

solar panel at that time.

Charging from Solar Panels

Solar charge directed to the PSU can be

distributed to the leisure battery, vehicle

battery, or each battery in turn. For further

details of selecting which battery receives the

solar charge, please see the EC800 or EC400+

instructions. Please note that solar charge can

only be directed to both leisure and vehicle

batteries, if the System Shutdown button is ON.

If System Shutdown is OFF, any available solar

charge will be directed to the vehicle battery

only.

If the vehicle battery is isolated, for instance via

the Fiat battery isolation feature, that battery

will not receive charge.

116

ELECTRICS

iNote: When the PSU System Shutdown

button is ON, there will be a small electrical

current draw, twenty-four hours a day, on

the selected battery - by default this is the

leisure battery. Similarly, if the Fiat or Ford

base vehicle battery is connected, there will

be a further small electrical current draw

on the vehicle battery from the Fiat or Ford

systems, twenty-four hours a day. Depending

on weather conditions and similar factors, the

solar panel and regulator may only be able to

provide charge for a few hours a day, which

may not be suﬃcient to maintain the condition

of leisure and vehicle batteries. Monitoring

of battery state of charge should be done

periodically.

Maintenance and cleaning

The solar panel will require cleaning periodically

in order to maintain the performance of the

panel. A caravan, car shampoo or simple soap

can be used, but do not use abrasive cleaners.

8.30 Accessory harnessing

Alarm Power Supply

A connection exists within the motorhome

harness, which can be used as a power supply

for an alarm or tracking system. For security

reasons, information regarding this is not

published; please contact your dealer for further

information.

Satellite Power Supply

Dependant on speciﬁcation, in many

motorhomes a power supply harness is included

for use with roof mounted satellite systems. This

power supply is terminated in a 4-way connector

marked ‘SATELLITE’, and carries 12v positive,

12v negative, and a signal which can be used to

detect when the vehicle engine is running. (The

engine run signal is required by some systems to

automatically retract satellite dishes.

Tow Bar Connection

The addition of a tow bar requires an electronic

interface to ensure compatibility between the

combined road lighting on the motorhome and

the trailer, and the road light monitoring system

on the Fiat base vehicle.

Your motorhome already features an interface

which enables the use of LED road lighting on

the motorhome body, and there is connectivity

on this device for the addition of a tow bar. It is

important that the correct tow bar electrical

harness is used, and your Swift Group dealer can

order and ﬁt this part for you. If a motorhome is

ﬁtted with reverse sensors and a tow bar, these

reverse sensors will be disabled when a trailer

is connected.

117

ELECTRICS

8.31 Generator usage

Caution should be used before connecting a

generator to your motorhome.

WARNING: Never start or stop the

generator while electrical loads are connected

and switched on. Start the engine, let it

stabilise, then connect the electrical load. To

stop engine, disconnect the electrical load and

let engine stabilise before switching oﬀ.

Whilst some generators use invertor

technology, others use a more basic principle

to generate the 230v supply. Preference should

be to choose a generator which produces a

consistent sinusoidal wave form with accurate

voltage control.

The reverse polarity warning light may

illuminate when using a generator. This is a

normal side eﬀect when using some types of

generator. Instead of connecting the neutral

and live conductors 110v above earth. This 110v

diﬀerence causes the neon polarity indicator to

illuminate.

In most cases it is safe to use a generator, but

please consult the generator handbook for

further information.

8.32 Habitation relay

Habitation relays are ﬁtted to motorhomes by

manufacturers to comply with the following

legislation:

The Road Vehicles (Construction and Use)

Regulations 1986 Regulation 60 - Radio

interference suppression

European Community Whole Vehicle Type

Approval (ECWVTA) framework directive

2007/46/EC and EU Regulation 661/2009

(General Safety) mandates UNECE Regulation

10 (Vehicles with regard to Electromagnetic

compatibility).

A habitation relay must be ﬁtted by

manufacturers, safe guarding the consumer,

the purpose of the relay is to disable

nonhomologated appliances/components

whilst the vehicle is in transit.

Unintentional electromagnetic energy can be

created by non-homologated devices within

the habitation compartment, which could cause

a malfunction of the base vehicles electronic

systems/components, including safety critical

items such as air bags, ABS braking etc.

In your motorhome the habitational relay is

within the power supply unit.

118

ELECTRICS

8.33 Fault Finding

The Swift Group recommends that electrical

fault ﬁnding is undertaken by a trained

Technician familiar with the systems involved.

The basic checks below are therefore limited

to items that can be checked without the use of

tools etc. If in any doubt please consult a Swift

dealer.

Power Supply

Fault Remedy

No 230v output from PSU See EC400+ or Swift Command information as appropriate

Reverse Polarity light illuminated See EC400+ or Swift Command information as appropriate

Control Panel Problems See EC400+ or Swift Command information as appropriate

Appliance Not Operating

Fault Remedy

Error code or fault light displayed

on appliance (eg fridge LCD

display)

Check appliance speciﬁc information for next steps

No display at appliance controls Check power supplies are available (electric hook up,

charger operating, battery in good state of charge). Majority

of appliances will not be operational when engine is running.

Ensure control panel is ON.

Check appropriate fusing in Power Supply unit

Internal Lighting

Fault Remedy

Lighting not operational Check power supplies are available Check control panel is ON

Locate furniture mounted switches, where appropriate

Check fuses on Power Supply Unit

Determine if light is LED or Tungsten / Halogen bulb, or

Fluorescent tube – check and replace bulb, or entire ﬁtting as

appropriate

119

ELECTRICS

Road Lighting

Fault Remedy

Dashboard warning light

illuminated / groups of road lights

inoperative

If Tow Bar ﬁtted check trailer lighting / disconnect trailer to

determine if this is the cause of the fault.

Check fuses in base vehicle dashboard or engine bay, see Fiat

or Ford handbook for details of which fuses are relevant

Check fuse in Power Supply Unit for auxiliary marker lights

(Amber side markers, Luton / upper rear markers)

Electric Step Operation (When ﬁtted)

Fault Remedy

Step will not automatically retract

with engine start

Check fuses in Power Supply Unit.

Check mechanical condition of step – clean / lubricate if

appropriate.

Check other functions that are linked to the running of the

vehicle engine (i.e. fridge 12v operation). If these are also

inoperative contact dealer.

Step does not respond to furniture

switch

Check fuses in power supply unit

Check mechanical condition of step – clean / lubricate if

appropriate.

It is possible to link the operation of the step to the lock/

unlock commands from the central locking keyfob. If this

feature is enabled on your motorhome, check if operation of

the step via the central locking keyfob is possible. To enable /

disable the keyfob feature contact your dealer.

VLM Fusebox

Your motorhome is ﬁtted with a secondary VLM interface, which is designed to work in conjunction

with the Fiat base vehicle. The secondary VLM allows the base vehicle to function with the LED rear

lights and still inform the user if the directional indicators are functioning or not, via the base vehicle

dash.

If a towed trailer is attached to this motorhome then the VLM fusebox will still allow the status of the

vehicle directional indicators to be relayed to the user along with informing the user if the directional

indicator on the towed trailer are functioning correctly.

120

ELECTRICS

Power Supply

Fault Remedy

Fresh water level sensor gives

incorrect readings

Use ﬂoor hatch within motorhome to access top of water

tank, or top of tank in bed box if internal (Escape), remove

sensor (4-screws) and clean probes

If problems persist, dealer assistance required for further

fault ﬁnding.

Waste water level sensor gives

incorrect readings

If possible, from below motorhome remove level sensor

from top of waste tank, and clean probes. Alternatively, clean

waste tank internal surfaces by ﬂushing through with water

or cleaning agent.

If problems persist, dealer assistance required for further

fault ﬁnding.

Battery Discharge

Fault Remedy

Leisure battery discharging earlier

than anticipated

Have condition of leisure battery checked by dealer or tyre/

exhaust/battery specialist

If motorhome is not in use, ensure ‘SYSTEM SHUTDOWN’

button on Power Supply Unit is being used to isolate all

circuits

If motorhome is in use, see consumption table in handbook –

are several items perating simultaneously / is total load likely

to cause discharge.

Check charger is operational when mains hook up is present,

and that the charger is allowed suﬃcient time to replenish

battery / batteries.

Vehicle battery discharging earlier

than anticipated

If appropriate to battery, check condition and top-up battery

ﬂuid if required

Have condition of leisure battery checked by dealer or tyre/

exhaust/battery specialist

If motorhome is not in use, see base vehicle handbook

section headed ‘periods of inactivity’. Consider use of vehicle

battery isolator

If motorhome is in use, check Power Supply Unit is conﬁgured

to charge / maintain both leisure and vehicle batteries.

(Contact dealer for further assistance if unsure)

121

ELECTRICS

Audiovisual Equipment

Fault Remedy

Rear view camera system

inoperative when reversing (if

ﬁtted)

Check if camera system can be switched on manually, using

power button on rear view mirror, or dash mounted screen.

Check Reverse Lights are operational on rear of motorhome.

(Check base vehicle fuses if reverse lights are inoperative.)

Rear view camera system

inoperative whether moving

forward or reversing (if ﬁtted)

Check fuses in habitation area fusebox (Power Supply Unit)

Radio switches oﬀ intermittently Radio will not remain on indeﬁnitely when vehicle ignition is

switched oﬀ. Please see below or the Fiat handbook.

122

ELECTRICS

123

9. Fitted Equipment

9.1 Truma Combination Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

9.2 Alde Compact 3030 Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

9.3 Alde Zonal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

9.4 Dometic absorption refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

9.5 Edge / Voyager / Escape / Ascari Thetford Triplex Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

9.6 Using the Grill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

9.7 Maintenance & servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

9.8 Kon-Tiki Thetford K1520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

9.9 Microwave owner general user instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

9.10 Care of the microwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

9.11 Thetford Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

9.12 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

9.13 Horrex Window Blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

9.14 Blind Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

9.15 Skyview operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

9.16 Escape, Ascari and Voyager cab roof window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

9.17 Roof lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

9.18 Omni-vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

9.19 Omni step single step (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

9.20 Thule T4200 / 8000 Omnistor Awning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

9.21 Reverse Camera System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

9.22 Cycle racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

9.23 Seat swivel (Driver/Passenger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

9.24 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

9.25 Side lockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

9.26 Aguti Smart Lounge (Escape, Voyager and Kon-Tiki) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

9.27 Bunk and luton bed safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

9.28 Powered Bed Mechanism (model speciﬁc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

9.29 Lippert Rise and Fall Island Bed (Kon-Tiki) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

9.30 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

9.31 Care of laminate tops, tables, furniture and doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

9.32 TV inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

9.33 Status 570 Digital antenna system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

9.34 TV Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

9.35 Motorhome Wiﬁ (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

9.36 Cab Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

9.37 Shower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

9.38 Motorhomes with external BBQ point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

9.39 The External Shower Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

9.40 Colour reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

FITTED EQUIPMENT

124

FITTED EQUIPMENT

iNote: The instructions covering ﬁtted

equipment to your motorhome were correct at

the time of going to print, and where possible,

hyperlinks and QR codes have been used,

which provide links to online versions of user

instructions. Owners handbooks are updated

annually and we take great care to try and

ensure their accuracy. However, the Swift

Group Limited cannot accept responsibility for

any changes that may be made in speciﬁcation

or operating instructions to the equipment

described in this section after the time of going

to press.

Every care is taken to ensure that the

information provided in this handbook is correct

and easy to understand.

Separate manufacturers’ leaﬂets on many of the

components are also included in the

Owner’s Pack provided with this motorhome

and we recommend that you compare the

instructions provided via the handbook with the

component manufacturers literature,

to ensure the information provided is as

accurate as possible.

If you are in any doubt as to how to operate

the equipment in your motorhome, please

contact the component manufacturer’s service

department on the telephone number shown

on their component leaﬂet. If you remain in any

doubt, please contact your supplying dealer.

iNote: In the interest of safety, replacement

parts for an appliance shall conform to the

appliance manufacturer’s speciﬁcations and

should be ﬁtted by them or their authorised

agents.

9.1 Truma Combination Boiler

The Truma Combination Boiler can be used in

the following ways:

To provide combined room heating and water

heating.

• Simultaneous heating of the room, and water

contained within the appliance. Often referred

to as Winter Mode.

To provide water heating only.

• Heating of the water within the appliance,

without room heating. Often referred to as

Summer Mode.

To provide room heating only, without water

heating.

• If the water system has not been primed,

meaning that there is no water within the

appliance, it is still possible to use the

Combination Boiler to heat the room.

Dual Fuel operation

The Truma Combination boiler has been

designed to run on gas or electric power, and the

optimum performance is obtained when used

in dual fuel mode, that is running on gas and

electric at the same time.

Running in dual mode has the following

beneﬁts:

• The fastest possible heat up time, as the gas

burner combines with an electric element to

provide energy to heat your hot water and

warm your motorhome.

• The intelligent heat management system

automatically senses when the water and

room are nearing the required temperature

and then automatically turns oﬀ your gas

burner and operates solely on electric power,

conserving your gas.

125

• As hot water is used or the room cools the

Truma combination heater will continue to

operate on electric only, until a point where

the demands necessitate that additional gas

power is also required. An example for such

a demand could be for instance if the exterior

door was left open and the room temperature

dropped by 10 degrees in the space of a few

minutes, in this case the intelligent heat

management system would decide the best

way to get the room back to the required

temperature, would be to use both gas and

electric at the same time.

Operating the Truma Combination system on

electric or gas only will result in longer heat up

times for hot water, and room temperature, in

comparison to operating on dual fuel.

Operating on electric only may not in all cases

maintain a comfortable room temperature

especially in colder conditions.

Whilst taking energy consumption and the

environment into account, consider using the

Combi in Summer mode (water heating only)

when room or space heating is not required, but

may be needed in the near future. This ensures

the appliance is held at the same temperature

as the hot water setting chosen, and this can

reduce the time taken to provide warm air into

the living area, when room or space heating is

then selected.

Truma Heating System and Air Flow

The Swift Group undertakes considerable

testing of our products in cold chambers to

ensure they meet the BS EN 1646 Grade 3

standard and are usable in cold temperatures.

Butterﬂy outlets

The majority of air ducting outlets on models

equipped with Truma Combi heating systems,

are of the butterﬂy type. These may be opened

or closed by moving the ﬂap within the ﬁtting,

to adjust the balance of the heating output

throughout the motorhome. This can help oﬀset

diﬀerences in blown air output, between outlets

close to the heating appliance, and those greater

distance away from the heating appliance.

This can also help adjust the temperature of the

bathroom, relative to the temperature of the

main living area and/or bedroom.

When these butterﬂies are closed in conjunction

with a high heating system output, and therefore

a high fan speed, a slight whistling sound can

occur. In this case, opening the outlet slightly

will reduce or remove the noise.

Closing too many outlets when the heating

system is producing a high output, can

cause the appliance to reach high operating

temperatures. This does not in general terms

eﬀect the appliance, but can cause the appliance

to automatically shut down. This can cause an

interruption of the heating of the motorhome,

however heating will resume when the

appliance temperatures have reduced to a lower

level.

The output of the appliance, and therefore the

output of the blown air outlets, will generally be

higher when using Gas or Duel Fuel operation.

Electric only operation of the heating is rated

at up to 1.8kW , whereas Gas (or Dual Fuel)

operation is rated up to 4kW (3.8kW) or 6kW

(6.9kW), depending which model or Combi is

ﬁtted.

The blown air ﬁttings can also be rotated to

adjust the direction of air leaving the outlet, as

shown in the photo.

Truma Combination Boiler Control Panel and

Appliance Instructions

Please read the user instructions before using

the heating system. The instructions include

warnings regarding the safe use of the system,

and no liability whatsoever can be accepted

for damage or injury resulting from failure to

observe the instructions.

FITTED EQUIPMENT

126

FITTED EQUIPMENT

The heating system can be controlled by the

Truma CP+ controller above the entrance

door, or, if Swift Command is ﬁtted, the Swift

Command control panel, App and remote

control features.

For Swift Command functions please see the

Swift Command literature and details within this

handbook.

For use of the CP Plus controller, and general

user instructions for the heating system

appliance, please read the Truma information

available at the following locations:

CP Plus Controller

https://bit.ly/3vPoHoD

Combi 4 Gas/Electric and Combi 6 Gas/ Electric

appliances

https://bit.ly/3p5H1pG

https://bit.ly/3SC9Sja

Electrical Operation of Truma Combination

Boiler

Before the heating system is used for heating

using electrical (230v) energy, the 230v

isolation button on the Sargent Power Supply

Unit must be switched ON, as shown in the

image below. To conﬁrm a supply is available,

the button will be illuminated when a power

supply (mains hook up) is connected and the

button is ON.

Troubleshooting instructions (Combi heater)

In the event of a problem occurring, a warning

or error code will be displayed on the Truma

CP Plus control panel, along with a warning

triangle. Further warning information will also

be displayed on the Swift Command control

panel.

The Truma combi boiler (heater and water) has

two styles of error code warnings which are

shown on the CP+ display panel. Depending

on the nature of the fault, the boiler will

require resetting in a slightly diﬀerent manner,

depending on the fault.

• Solid error warning code

• Flashing error warning code

Before trying to reset any faults please check

that the 12v supply is on, and depending on

which energy source is going to be used for

heating, either mains electricity is available and

switched on, and/or that the gas bottle is open

and ready to dispense gas.

The following table on the next page describes

causes and remedies to the various fault codes

that may be displayed on the Truma control

panel.

Once the fault has been rectiﬁed the fault can be

reset via the control panel

SOLID CODE

Using the control dial on the cp+ panel scroll

down to the bottom line where the triangle

appears.

• Press this button to acknowledge the error

• The error code and triangle should disappear

if the fault has been rectiﬁed

FLASHING CODE

• Scroll round (as above) to acknowledge the

error on the panel

• Leave the panel UNTOUCHED for 15 minutes –

This allows the user to check that fuel sources

are available, and is a regulatory time frame

• After 15 minutes the triangle will become solid

• The panel can be reset as per the above

process for SOLID

127

FITTED EQUIPMENT

Error

code

Cause Remedy

#17 Summer mode with empty

water container

Switch heater oﬀ and allow to cool. Fill boiler with

water

#18 Warm air temperature exceeded:

Not all warm air ducts are

connected

Check whether the 4 warm air ducts are connected

Circulated air intake blocked Remove the circulated air intake blockage

#21 Room temperature sensor or

cable faulty

Inspect the room temperature sensor cable, replace

if faulty

Check the resisitance of the room temperature sensor.

15°C - 16.2 kOhm / 20°C - 12,6 kOhm / 25°C

- 10.0 kOhm

Replace room temperature sensor if faulty

#24 Risk of low voltage. Battery

voltage is too low < 10.4V

Charge battery

#29 Frost Control heating element

has a short circuit

Disconnect heating element plug from electronic

control unit. Replace heating element

#42 Open window above cowl

(window switch)

Clode window

#43 Overvoltage > 16.4V Check battery voltage / voltage sources such as the

charger

#44 Low voltage. Battery voltage is

too low <10.0V

Charge battery. If necessary replace old battery

#45 No 230 V operating voltage Restore 230 V operating voltage

230 V fuse defective Replace 230 V fuse (see Combi operating instructions)

Overheating protection has

been triggered

Reset overheating protection (see Combi operating

instructions)

If the CP+ panel is reset 5 times, without the

fault being rectiﬁed the fault will become a

‘FLASHING’ CODE and will be locked for 15

minutes. If the control panel (cp+) is touched

within 15 minutes, the 15 minute ‘count’ will

restart. It is imperative that the panel is left

untouched during this time.

Truma Customer Service can be contacted on

01283 587960 or technical@trumauk.com if you

require further assistance.

128

FITTED EQUIPMENT

#255 Heater has no 12 V power

supply

Ensure 12 V power supply

No connection between heater

and control

panel

Make connection between heater and control

panel

#301

#417

Overvoltage > 16.4 V Check battery voltage / voltage sources such as the

charger

#303

#411

Risk of low voltage. Battery

voltage is too low < 10.4V

Charge battery

#401 Summer mode with empty

water container

Switch heater oﬀ and allow to cool. Fill boiler with

water

# 402 Open window above cowl

(window switch)

Clode window

# 407 Overvoltage > 16.4V Check battery voltage / voltage sources such as the

charger

# 408 Low voltage. Battery voltage is

too low <10.0V

Charge battery. If necessary replace old battery

# 412 No 230 V operating voltage Restore 230 V operating voltage

230 V fuse defective Replace 230 V fuse (see Combi operating instructions)

Overheating protection has

been triggered

Reset overheating protection (see Combi operating

instructions)

# 419 Gas cylinder empty Wait 15 minutes and reset fault

Error

code

Cause Remedy

#112

#121

#122

#202

#211

#212

Gas cylinder empty Replacing a gas cylinder

Gas cylinder or quick-acting

valve in the gas supply line

closed

Check gas supply and open valves

Gas pressure regulation

system iced up

Use regulator heater (EisEx)

Butane content in the gas

cylinder too high

Use propane. Butane is unsuitable for heating,

particularly at temperatures lower than 10 °C.

Combustion air infeed or

exhaust outlet is sealed

Inspect openings for obstructions (slush, ice, leaves,

etc.) and remove any obstructions

Gas pressure regulation

system faulty

Inspect / replace gas pressure regulation system

Truma Combi Heating fault codes 507, 516 or

517.

This fault will appear in the display of the Truma

Combi digital display in the Truma CP Plus

control panel. This is a preventative measure

to stop the heater constantly trying to restart if

there is no gas and is referred to as ‘gas lockout’.

iNote: If the fault 507, 516 or 517 is

displayed in the heater’s control panel,

switching the control panel on and oﬀ does not

help. This does not delete the fault, but blocks

the heater for 15 minutes. The heater is also

blocked for 15 minutes if the fault 507, 516

or 517 is deleted four times without the gas

supply being established.

129

FITTED EQUIPMENT

# 514 The 12V supply has been

interupted

Ensure the control panel of caravan / motorhome is

switched on. Ensure charger is switched on and / or

battery is connected

# 507

# 516

# 517

Gas cylinder empty Replacing a gas cylinder

Gas cylinder or quick-acting

valve in the gas supply line

closed

Check gas supply and open valves

Gas pressure regulation

system iced up

Use regulator heater (EisEx)

Butane content in the gas

cylinder too high

Use propane. Butane is unsuitable for heating,

particularly at temperatures lower than 10 °C.

Gas pressure regulation

system faulty

Inspect / replace gas pressure regulation system

Gas pressure regulation

system faulty

Inspect / replace gas pressure regulation system

Gas supply interupted

Remedying ﬂashing fault

507 / 516 / 517 (gas supply

interrupted)

Restore the gas supply, for example by connecting a

full gas cylinder.

Then conﬁrm or delete the fault code by tapping the

rotary push button. Please note that the ﬁrst tap might

only activate the backlighting of the control panel.

The heating then starts automatically if there is a

heating requirement.

The fault code 507, 516 or 517 ﬂashes because the

heater is still in a 15-minute blocking time. This was

possibly caused by the heater control panel being

switched oﬀ or because the heater’s 12-Volt supply

was interrupted. The heater is also blocked for 15

minutes if the displayed fault is deleted four times

without the gas supply being restored.

• Wait out the 15-minute blocking time for the heater.

During this time, do not switch oﬀ the heater’s

control panel and also do not interrupt the power

supply.

• As soon as the heater’s blocking time has expired,

the fault is then displayed permanently rather than

ﬂashing. It can now be deleted as described in the

point above

# 607 Max. number of fault resets

reached

Wait 15 minutes and reset fault

# 621 Room temperature sensor or

cable faulty

Inspect the room temperature sensor cable, replace

if faulty

Check the resistance of the room temperature sensor.

15 °C – 16.2 kOhm / 20 °C – 12.6 kOhm / 25

°C – 10.0 kOhm

Replace room temperature sensor if faulty

# 624 FrostControl heating element

has a short circuit

Disconnect heating element plug from electronic

control unit. Replace heating element

If these measures do not remedy the fault or if fault codes are displayed that you cannot ﬁnd in the

troubleshooting guide, contact Truma Service.

130

FITTED EQUIPMENT

9.2 Alde Compact 3030 Boiler

The Alde Boiler can be used in the following

ways:

To provide combined room heating and water

heating.

• Simultaneous heating of the room, and water

contained within the appliance.

To provide water heating only.

• Heating of the water within the appliance,

without room heating.

To provide room heating only, without water

heating.

• If the water system has not been primed,

meaning that there is no water within the

appliance, it is still possible to use the Alde

3030 to heat the room.

Alde 3030 Control Panel and Appliance

Instructions

Please read the user instructions before using

the heating system. The instructions include

warnings regarding the safe use of the system,

and no liability whatsoever can be accepted

for damage or injury resulting from failure to

observe the instructions.

The heating system can be controlled by the

Alde 3030 colour touch screen controller ﬁtted

above the entrance door, or, if ﬁtted, the Swift

Command control pane, App and remote control

features.

For Swift Command functions please see the

Swift Command literature and details within this

handbook.

For use of the 3030 colour touch screen control

panel, and the 3030 system appliance, please

read the information available at the following

locations:

3030 Alde Heating System

https://bit.ly/3QfBlpg

Electrical Operation of Alde 3030 Heating

System

Before the heating system is used for heating

using electrical (230v) energy, the 230v isolation

button on the Sargent Power Supply Unit must

be switched ON, as shown in the image below.

To conﬁrm a supply is available, the button will

be illuminated when a power supply (mains

hook up) is connected and the button is ON.

Heating/Hot

water

131

FITTED EQUIPMENT

9.3 Alde Zonal Control

The Kon-Tiki range of motorhomes is ﬁtted

with a second thermostat, which can be used to

control the heating system.

In normal use (and on other ranges), the room

temperature is measured by a sensor within the

Alde touch screen control panel. With the Zonal

control, it is possible to select room temperature

measurement at this control panel position, or,

via the secondary temperature sensor ﬁtted in

the rear lounge or sleeping area.

Typical 2nd thermostat and switch installation

The 2nd sensor is a circular furniture mounted

device, which has the word ‘Alde’ embossed on

its surface. Next to the sensor, a Black round

switch will feature ‘0’ and ‘1’ markings.

With the switch in the ‘0’ position, the room

temperature will be measured at the Alde touch

screen control panel.

With the switch in the ‘1’ position, the room

temperature will be measured at the 2nd

temperature sensor position.

9.4 Dometic absorption refrigerator

Before you start using the refrigerator, please

read the operating instructions carefully.

These instructions provide you with the

necessary guidance for the proper use of your

refrigerator. Observe in particular the safety

instructions. Observation of the instructions

and handling recommendations is important

for dealing with the refrigerator safely and for

protecting you from injury and the refrigerator

from damage. You must understand what you

have read before you carry out a task.

Keep these instructions in a safe place close to

the refrigerator so they may be referred to at

any time.

Your motorhome is ﬁtted with an absorption

refrigerator from the Dometic range. The exact

model ﬁtted varies, and the model ﬁtted can

be conﬁrmed by the data label ﬁxed within the

fridge compartment. This label will feature a

model number in the format RM8406, RMS8556,

RML9336L, RMD8556 or similar.

Using this model number, please read the user

instructions for the refrigerator, which are

available from the following location:

http://td.dometicgroup.com/swift.php

If you are unable to view the documents on line,

please contact the supplier, your dealer or Swift

for an electronic or paper copy.

iNote: Gas operation of fridges – gas

lockout

If the fridge makes three unsuccessful

attempts to switch to gas mode, further

action may be required before gas operation

is possible. This could occur if a gas bottle is

empty, or if the fridge is switched on before the

valve on the gas bottle is opened. The display

on the fridge will show ﬂashing LED’s against

the gas symbol and the warning symbol.

If this does happen, ﬁrst check that a gas

supply is available: After checking the valve on

the gas bottle is open, and that the taps on the

gas manifold are in the correct position, light

one of the gas burners on the hob for a few

seconds to conﬁrm gas is available.

Next, at the fridge, press the power ON/

OFF button for 2-3 seconds until the fridge

beeps, this will clear the warning, and normal

automatic selection of energy sources will

resume. If the button is pressed for slightly

longer, the fridge will switch oﬀ. In the event

of this happening, simply use the same power

button to turn the fridge back on, then press

again for 2-3 seconds to clear the warning.

Please note the fridge also has a TANK STOP

feature, which prevents gas operation for 15

minutes immediately after 12v operation, this

prevents the fridge from attempting to light

the gas while re-fuelling mid journey. Please

take this 15 minute delay into account if the

fridge switches from 12v operation to gas

operation.

132

FITTED EQUIPMENT

9.5 Edge / Voyager / Escape / Ascari

Thetford Triplex Cooker

Cooker 3 burner with combined grill

and oven / cooker 3 burner + electric

hotplate with separate grill and oven

Burner operation

Important

• Although each burner will support pans

from 10 to 22cm, care should be taken not to

overload the appliance as performance may

be reduced.

• The following pan sizes are the maximum:

• Auxiliary Burner:- Ø200mm Semi-Rapid

Burner:- 2x Ø200mm or 1x Ø220mm with 1x

Ø180mm

Electric Hotplate:- Ø180mm

• When using small pans the ﬂames should not

spread beyond the base of the pan as this will

reduce the eﬃciency of the burner.

• Avoid old or misshapen pans as these may

cause instability.

• The lid must be opened fully prior to using the

hotplate burners.

Using the Hotplate Gas Burners

1. Ensure gas cylinder is connected and turned

on and the shut oﬀ valve at the manifold is

open. In the event of a gas smell turn oﬀ at

gas cylinder and contact supplier.

2. Flame supervision: Each burner is

controlled individually and is monitored

by a thermocouple probe. In the event

of the burner ﬂames being accidentally

extinguished, turn oﬀ the burner control and

do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at

least one minute.

3. To light: Push in the control knob and turn

to full rate – see Fig.1. Hold a lighted match

or taper to the burner and push the control

knob in and hold. It is necessary to hold

the knob depressed after the burner has

ignited for approximately 10 - 15 seconds,

to allow the thermocouple probe to reach

temperature, before releasing the knob.

Should the ﬂame go out when the knob is

released, the procedure should be repeated

holding the knob depressed for slightly

longer.

4. For models ﬁtted with Spark Ignition the

procedure is similar except that the burner

can be ignited by depressing the ignition

button, which is located on the fascia. If

the burner has not lit within 15 seconds the

control knob should be released and the

burner left for at least 1 minute before a

further attempt to ignite the burner.

5. For simmering, turn the knob further anti-

clockwise to the low rate position.

6. To turn oﬀ: Turn the control knob until the

line on the control knob is aligned with the

dot on the control panel. Always make sure

the control knob is in the oﬀ position when

you have ﬁnished using the hotplate burners.

133

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

WARNING:

Glass lids may shatter when heated. Turn oﬀ

the hotplate and allow it to cool before closing

the glass lid

Remove all spillage from the surface of the

glass lid before opening.

The glass lid has the tendency to snap shut

towards the end of lowering.

This is caused by the travel lock action of the

hinges as it is activated.

Make sure all ﬁngers are removed from

appliance when closing the lid.

WARNING: The use of the gas hobs will

generate heat. We recommend, to avoid

excess build-up of heat around the cooker

area, the window is left opened when cooking

to allow for additional ventilation.

WARNING (Select Compact C404 / Ascari

344):

Do not use the hob unless the bed is lifted to

the highest stowage position.

IMPORTANT

• Depending on speciﬁcation, your appliance

may be ﬁtted with a glass lid shut-oﬀ system,

which cuts oﬀ the power to all hotplate

burners (gas and electric) if the lid is closed.

• Ensure the glass lid is in the open and upright

position before turning on the hotplate

burners.

• Not all models are ﬁtted with the shut-oﬀ

system.

iNote: The cooker has a glass lid safety shut

oﬀ switch that turns oﬀ the gas hob burners

and electrical hotplate, when the glass lid is

placed down on the hob. The grill and oven

functions will still operate as normal, with lid

up or down.

Operation

WARNING: The grill must only be used with

the door open.

On combined grill and oven cookers the heat

deﬂector below the fascia should be pulled

out prior to lighting the grill. Never adjust the

heat deﬂector position without using hand

protection i.e. oven gloves. See Fig. 2

On separate grill and oven cookers the grill

area can get hot when the oven is in use, even

if the grill is switched oﬀ.

Care should be taken when removing pans

from the grill, i.e. use of oven gloves, and by

making use of the removal grill pan handle.

Important

• The grill pan supplied is multi functional, for

use in grill or oven.

• The handle design allows removal or insertion

whilst the pan is in use.

• Always remove the handle when the pan is in

use.

• The grill MUST only be used with the door

open.

134

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.6 Using the Grill

Fig. 2

1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected and

turned on. In the event of a gas smell turn oﬀ

at gas cylinder/mains and contact supplier.

2. To light: Open door, pull out heat shield (Fig.

2) push in the control knob and turn to full

rate – see Fig 1 (page 132). Hold a lighted

match or taper to the burner and push the

control knob in and hold. The burner should

ignite and the control knob should be held in

for 10 -15 seconds before release.

If the burner goes out, repeat procedure holding

control knob for slightly longer.

3. For models ﬁtted with Spark Ignition the

procedure is similar except that the burner

can be ignited by depressing the ignition

button, which is located on the fascia.

Ignition must be carried out with the door

open, and if the burner has not lit within 15

seconds the control knob should be released

and the grill left for at least 1 minute before a

further attempt to ignite the burner.

iNote: the grill must only be used with the

door open.

4. On ﬁrst use of the grill, it should be heated

for about 20 minutes to eliminate any

residual factory lubricants that might impart

unpleasant smells to the food being cooked.

A non-toxic smoke may occur when using for

the ﬁrst time so open any windows and turn

on mechanical ventilators to help remove

the smoke.

5. Although the grill does heat up quickly, a few

minutes preheat is recommended.

6. Flame Failure Device (FFD): the grill burner

is ﬁtted with a ﬂame sensing probe, which

will automatically cut oﬀ the gas supply in

the event of the ﬂame going out. In the event

of the burner ﬂames being accidentally

extinguished, turn oﬀ the burner control and

do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at

least one minute.

7. It is normal for the ﬂames on this burner to

develop yellow tips as it heats up.

8. A reversible grill pan trivet enables the

correct grilling height to be achieved.

Fast Toasting

trivet in high position

Grilling Sausages

trivet in high position

Grilling Steak/Bacon

trivet in high position

Grilling Chops, etc

trivet in low position

Slow Grilling

trivet removed

9. To turn oﬀ: turn the control knob until the line

on the control knob is aligned with the dot

on the control panel. Always make sure the

control knob is in the oﬀ position when you

have ﬁnished grilling.

Important:

• The pan supplied with the appliance is multi

functional, for use either whilst grilling or

when using the oven.

• The handle design allows removal or insertion

whilst the pan is in use.

WARNING: Pans must not touch the

glass lid.

iNote: To avoid heat build up around the hob

open the kitchen window slightly to allow the

heat to dissipate.

Operation

Important

• If the appliance is ﬁtted with a cooling system.

The cooling fans should automatically switch

on a couple of minutes after the grill and/or

oven is turned on, and will remain on even

after the appliance has been switched oﬀ.

• The fans should automatically switch oﬀ a few

minutes after the appliance has been switched

oﬀ, when the front of the appliance has cooled

suﬃciently.

• A constant 12V supply is necessary at all

times to ensure the cooling system operates

correctly.

135

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

Using the Oven

1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected and

turned on. In the event of a gas smell turn oﬀ

at gas cylinder/mains and contact supplier.

2. To light: Open door, push in the control knob

and turn to full rate (240°C). Hold a lighted

match or taper to the burner and push the

control knob in and hold. The burner should

ignite and the control knob should be held

in for 10 -15 seconds before release. If the

burner goes out, repeat procedure holding

control knob for slightly longer.

3. For models ﬁtted with Spark Ignition the

procedure is similar except that the burner

can be ignited by depressing the ignition

button, which is located on the fascia.

Ignition must be carried out with the door

open, and if the burner has not lit within 15

seconds the control knob should be released

and the oven left for at least 1 minute before

a further attempt to ignite the burner.

4. Place the oven shelf in the required

position and close the door. Set control

knob to approximately 200°C and heat the

oven for about 30 minutes to eliminate

any residual factory lubricants that might

impart unpleasant smells to the meals being

cooked. A non-toxic smoke may occur when

using for the ﬁrst time so open any windows

and turn on mechanical ventilators to help

remove the smoke.

5. Although the oven does heat up quickly, it

is recommended that a 10 minute preheat

be allowed. The oven should be up to full

temperature in about 15-20mins.

6. To turn oﬀ: turn the control knob until the line

on the control knob is aligned with the dot on

the control panel.

7. Shelf: the shelf has been designed to allow

good circulation at the rear of the oven and is

also ﬁtted with a raised bar to prevent trays

or dishes making contact with the back of the

oven. To remove a shelf, pull forward until it

stops, raise at front and remove.

WARNING: The pans and trays supplied

with this appliance are the maximum sizes

recommended for use. Larger pans and

trays may restrict good circulation of heat,

increasing cooking times.

Oven Temperature Control

The temperature in the oven is controlled

by a thermostatic gas tap and is variable

over the range 130°C to 240°C. Approximate

temperatures for the settings on the control

knob are shown in the table below. The

temperatures indicated refer to the centre of

the oven and at any particular setting the oven

will be hotter at the top and cooler towards the

base.

The variation between top and centre, and

centre to bottom is approximately equivalent to

one gas mark. Good use can be made

of the temperature variation in several dishes

requiring diﬀerent temperatures may be cooked

at the same time. In this way maximum beneﬁt

can be obtained from the gas used to heat the

oven. Care should be taken not to overload the

oven, adequate spacing being used to allow free

circulation for heat.

Operation

Cooking Guidelines

Best results will be obtained by the shelf

positions in this guide. It is not necessary to

preheat the oven but advisable for a range of

dishes. The oven is capable of full temperature

in 15-20 minutes.

Most cookery books give details of the shelf

positions and gas mark settings for each recipe.

If in doubt about a recipe you intend to use, study

the recipe carefully then ﬁnd a similar dish in our

guide and use our shelf position and gas mark

setting recommendation.

136

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

When roasting with aluminium foil care must be

taken that the foil does not impair circulation or

block the oven ﬂue outlet.

Gas Mark Temperature

(Centre - Shelf Pos. 2)

1/4 - 1/2 265 - 275°F 130-135°C

1 285 140

2 300 150

3 330 165

4 355 180

5 385 195

6 410 210

7 430 220

8 445 230

9 465 240

iNote: Shelf positions are from the top

down.

Do’s and don’ts

Do read the user instructions carefully before

using the appliance for the ﬁrst time.

Do allow the oven to heat before using for the

ﬁrst time, in order to expel any smells before the

introduction of food.

Do clean the appliance regularly.

Do remove spills as soon as they occur.

Do always use oven gloves when removing food

shelves and trays from the oven.

Do check that controls are in the oﬀ position

when ﬁnished.

Don’t allow children near the cooker when in

use. Turn pan handles away from the front so

that they cannot be caught accidentally.

Don’t allow fats or oils to build up in the oven

trays or base.

Don’t use abrasive cleaners or powders that will

scratch the surfaces of the appliance.

Don’t under any circumstances use the oven as

a space heater.

Don’t put heavy objects onto open grill and oven

doors.

Leaks

If a smell of gas becomes apparent, the

supply should be turned oﬀ at the cylinder

IMMEDIATELY.

WARNING: Extinguish naked lights

including cigarettes and pipes. Do not

operate electrical switches. Open all doors

and windows to disperse any gas escape.

LPG gas is heavier than air; any escaping

gas will therefore collect at a low level. The

strong unpleasant smell of gas will enable the

general area of the leak to be detected. Check

that the gas is not escaping from an unlighted

appliance. Never check for leaks with a naked

ﬂame, leak investigation should be carried out

using a leak detector spray.

9.7 Maintenance & servicing

Important

• Shut oﬀ gas supply at isolating valve, switch

oﬀ electric supply and ensure all parts are cool

before cleaning or servicing

• All servicing must be carried out by an

approved competent person.

• After each service the appliance must be

checked for gas soundness

• This appliance must not be modiﬁed or

adjusted unless authorized and carried out by

the manufacturer or his representative.

• No parts other than those supplied by

the manufacturer should be used on this

appliance.

• If the supply cord is damaged, it must only

be replaced by the manufacturer or his

representative in order to avoid a hazard.

This appliance needs little maintenance other

than cleaning. All parts should be cleaned

using warm soapy water. Do not use abrasive

cleaners, steel wool or cleansing powders.

When cleaning the burner ring it is essential to

ensure that the holes do not become blocked.

The control knobs are a push ﬁt and can be

removed for cleaning. They areinterchangeable

without aﬀecting the sense of operation.

137

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.8 Kon-Tiki Thetford K1520

iNote: Before using the Hob, Grill or

Oven for the ﬁrst time carefully read the

cooking appliance manufacturer’s operating

instructions supplied with your motorhome.

These instructions provide you with the

necessary guidance for the proper use of

your Hob, Grill or Oven. Observe in particular

the safety instructions. Observation of the

instructions and handling recommendations

is important for dealing with the appliance

safely and for protecting you from injury and the

appliance from damage. You must understand

what you have read before you carry out a task.

Keep these instructions in a safe place close

to the appliance so they may be referred to at

any time. For the latest version of the Thetford

Manual, please visit:

https://bit.ly/3BVxIQI

WARNING:

Appliances and accessible parts become hot

during use.

Always use hand protection, e.g. oven gloves,

when loading items into or removing them

from the oven or grill.

Avoid touching heating elements.

Children less than 8 years of age shall be kept

away unless continuously supervised.

Children shall not play with the appliances.

Unattended cooking on a hob with fat or oil can

be dangerous and may result in ﬁre.

Never extinguish a ﬁre with water, switch oﬀ

the appliance and cover ﬂame with lid or ﬁre

blanket.

Danger of Fire: Do not store items on the

cooking surface.

CAUTION:

• Do not use harsh abrasive cleaners or sharp

metal scrapers to clean the hob glass lid or

oven door glass since they can scratch the

surface, which may result in shattering of

the glass.

• Never use a steam cleaner to clean

appliance.

WARNING: Before using the appliances

for the ﬁrst time, remove all accessories and

packing in the grill and oven, including any

surface protection ﬁlm, i.e. plastic coating.

Gas Operation

Ensure the gas cylinder is turned on and the

oven / hob gas isolation valve is open at the

manifold. The burners on these appliances have

ﬁxed aeration and no adjustment is required.

Depending on the gas being used, the burners

should ﬂame as follows:

Propane - The ﬂames should burn quietly with a

blue/green colour with no sign of yellow tips.

Butane - Normally on initial lighting, as small

amount of yellow tipping will occur and then

slightly increases as the burner heats up.

iNote: For safe use of gas see gas safety

advice on page 59

WARNING: The grill must only be used with

the door open.

Glass Lids

Depending on speciﬁcation, your appliance may

be ﬁtted with a glass lid shut-oﬀ system, which

cuts oﬀ the power to all hotplate burners (gas

and electric) if the lid is closed.

• Ensure the glass lid is in the open and upright

position before turning on the hotplate

burners.

WARNING:

• Glass lids may shatter when heated. Turn

oﬀ the hotplate and allow it to cool before

closing the glass lid

• Remove all spillage from the surface of the

glass lid before opening.

• The glass lid on some models has the

tendency to snap shut towards the end of

lowering. This is caused by the travel lock

action of the hinges as it is activated. Make

sure all ﬁngers are removed from appliance

when closing the lid.

138

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

Do’s and Don’ts

Do read the user instructions carefully

before using the appliance for the ﬁrst

time.

Do allow the oven to heat before using

for the ﬁrst time, in order to expel any

smells before the introduction of food.

Do clean the appliance regularly.

Do remove spills as soon as they occur.

Do always use oven gloves when removing

food shelves and trays from the oven.

Do check that controls are in the oﬀ

position.

Don’t allow children near the cooker when

in use. Turn pan handles away from

the front so that they cannot be caught

accidentally.

Don’t allow fats or oils to build up in the oven

tray or base.

Don’t use abrasive cleaners or powders

that will scratch the surfaces of the

appliance.

Don’t under any circumstances use the oven

as a space heater.

Don’t put heavy objects onto open grill and

oven doors.

WARNING: The use of the electric

hotplate and gas hobs will generate heat. We

recommend, to avoid excess build-up of heat

around the cooker area, the window is left

opened when cooking to allow for additional

ventilation.Microwave oven general

user instructions.

Ascari Hob and Oven

The kitchen of the Ascari models includes

the Dometic CVH1700G Hob and the Dometic

OG2000 Oven and Grill. Before you start using

these appliances, please read the operating

instructions carefully. These instructions

provide you with the necessary guidance for

the proper use of your appliances. Observe in

particular the safety instructions. Observation of

the instructions and handling recommendations

is important for dealing with the appliances

safely and for protecting you from injury and the

appliances from damage. You must understand

what you have read before you carry out a task.

Keep these instructions in a safe place so they

may be referred to at any time.

Using this model number, please read the

user instructions for the appliance, which are

available from the following location:

http://td.dometicgroup.com/swift.php

If you are unable to view the documents on line,

please contact the supplier, your dealer or Swift

for an electronic or paper copy.

9.9 Microwave owner general user

instructions

iNote: Always refer to the microwave

operating instructions supplied with the

vehicle.

iNote: Take precautions to avoid possible

exposure to excessive microwave energy

WARNING:

Do not attempt to operate this oven with the

door open since open door operation can

result in harmful exposure to microwave

energy. It is important not to defeat or tamper

with the safety interlocks.

WARNING:

Do not place any objects between the oven

front face of the door or allow soil or cleaner

residue to accumulate on sealing surfaces.

WARNING:

If the door or door seals are damaged, the oven

must not be operated until it has been repaired

by a competent person.

WARNING:

It is hazardous for anyone other than a

competent person to carry out a service or

repair operation.

WARNING:

Liquids or other foods must not be heated

in sealed containers since they are liable to

explode.

WARNING:

Only allow children to use the oven without

139

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

supervision when adequate instruction has

been given so that the child is able to use

the oven in a safe way and understands the

hazards of improper use.

WARNING:

When the appliance is operated in the

combination mode, children should only use

the oven under adult supervision due to the

temperature generated (if provided).

Important safety guidance

WARNING: To prevent ﬁre, burns, electric

shock and other warnings. Listed below are,

as with all appliances, certain rules to follow

and safeguards to assure high performance

from this oven.

Important instructions

1. Do not use the oven for any reason other

than food preparation, such as for drying

clothes, paper, or any other non food items or

for sterilizing purposes.

2. Do not use the oven when empty, this could

damage the oven.

3. Do not use the oven cavity for any type

of storage, such as papers, cookbook,

cookware etc.

4. Do not operate the oven without the glass

tray in place. Be sure it is sitting properly on

the rotating base.

5. Make sure you remove caps or lids prior

to cooking when you cook food sealed in

bottles.

6. Do not put foreign material between the

oven surface and door. It could result in

excessive leakage of microwave energy.

7. Do not use recycled paper products for

cooking. They may contain impurities which

could cause sparks and/or ﬁres when used

during cooking.

8. Do not pop popcorn unless popped in a

microwave approved popcorn popper or

unless it’s commercially packaged and

recommended especially for microwave

ovens. Microwave popped corn produces

a lower yield than conventional popping;

there will be a number of unpopped kernels.

Do not use oil unless speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

9. Do not cook any food surrounded by a

membrane, such as egg yolks, potatoes,

chicken livers, etc., without ﬁrst piercing

them several times with a fork.

10. Do not pop popcorn longer than the

manufacturer’s directions. (Popping time is

generally below 3 minutes). Longer cooking

does not yield more popped corn it can cause

scorching and ﬁre. Also, the cooking tray can

become too hot to handle or may break.

11. If smoke is observed, switch oﬀ or unplug the

appliance and keep the door closed in order

to stiﬂe any ﬂames.

12. When heating food in plastic or paper

containers, keep an eye on the oven due to

the possibility of ignition.

13. The contents of feeding bottles and baby

food jars shall be stirred or shaken and the

temperature checked before consumption,

in order to avoid burns.

14. Always test the temperature of food or drink

which has been heated in a microwave oven

before you give it to somebody, especially to

children or elderly people. This is important

because things which have been heated in

a microwave oven carry on getting hotter

even though the microwave oven cooking

has stopped.

15. Eggs in their shell and whole hard-boiled

eggs should not be heated in microwave

ovens since they may explode, even after

microwave heating has ended.

16. Keep the waveguide cover clean at all times.

Wipe the oven interior with a soft damp

cloth after each use. If you leave grease or

fat anywhere in the cavity it may overheat,

smoke or even catch ﬁre when next using

the oven.

17. Never heat oil or fat for deep frying as you

cannot control the temperature and doing so

may lead to overheating and ﬁre.

18. Liquids, such as water, coﬀee, or tea are

able to be overheated beyond the boiling

point without appearing to be boiling due to

surface tension of the Iiquid. Visible bubbling

or boiling when the container is removed

from the microwave oven is not always

present.

This could result in very hot liquid suddenly

boiling over when a spoon or other utensil is

inserted into the liquid.

140

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

To reduce the risk of Injury to persons:

a. Do not overheat the liquid.

b. Stir the Iiquid both before and halfway

through heating it.

c. Do not use straight-sided containers with

narrow necks.

d. After heating, allow the container to stand in

the microwave oven for a short time before

removing the container

e. Use extreme care when inserting a spoon or

other utensil into the container.

9.10 Care of the microwave

1. Turn the oven oﬀ before cleaning

2. Keep the inside of the oven clean. When food

spatters or spilled liquids adhere to oven

walls, wipe with a damp cloth.

3. Mild detergent may be used if the oven gets

very dirty. The use of harsh detergent or

abrasives is not recommended.

4. The outside oven surface should be cleaned

with soap and water, rinsed and dried

with a soft cloth. To prevent damage to

the operating parts inside the oven, water

should not be allowed to seep into the

ventilation openings. If the Control Panel

becomes wet, clean with a soft dry cloth. Do

not use harsh detergents or abrasives on the

Control Panel.

5. If steam accumulates inside or around

the outside of the oven door, wipe with

a soft cloth. This may occur when the

microwave oven is operated under high

humidity conditions and in no way indicates

malfunction of the unit.

6. It is occasionally necessary to remove the

glass tray for cleaning. Wash the tray in

warm sudsy water or in a dishwasher.

7. The oven cavity ﬂoor should be cleaned

regularly to avoid excessive noise. Simply

wipe the bottom surface of the oven with

mild detergent water or window cleaner and

dry. The roller guide may be washed in mild

sudsy water.

8. The oven should be cleaned regularly and

any food deposits removed;

9. Failure to maintain the oven in a clean

condition could lead to deterioration of the

surface that could adversely aﬀect the life

of the appliance and possibly result in a

hazardous situation.

9.11 Thetford Toilet

Your motorhome is ﬁtted with a Thetford

C260 toilet, which is plumbed directly into the

motorhome water system, and does not have its

own ﬂush tank. Using the C260 model number,

please read the user instructions for the toilet,

which are available from the following location:

https://bit.ly/3vQc24X

If you are unable to view the documents on line,

please contact the supplier, your dealer or Swift

for an electronic or paper copy.

141

Fault Remedy

Bowl does not

drain when

toilet is ﬂushed.

Cassette is

overﬁlled

DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. While inside the motorhome turn ﬂush knob anti-clockwise to

open valve blade and leave it in the open position. Open access door on side of motorhome.

Rotate pour-out spout outward. Place appropriate size container under spout cap. Remove

cap carefully. Allow bowl contents to drain into container. This will lower the water level in the

bowl.

Replace cap and return pour-out spout to stored position. DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE.

Go inside the motorhome and turn the ﬂush knob clockwise to close valve blade. Now, the

cassette may be removed following the normal removal and emptying procedure.

Odours Use proper amount of holding tank deodorant speciﬁed on bottle.

Toilet tissue

does not ﬁt into

compartment.

Since some tissues are supplied on larger rolls, it may be necessary to use some tissue before

storing into compartment.

Soiled bowl

after ﬂushing

Partially ﬁll bowl to cover soiled portion of bowl. Next ﬂush will dissolve waste. Tip: Leave

valve blade open during use.

No power to

add water to

toilet bowl

Check cassette safety sensor switch and fuse-holder for proper engagement and operation.

Note: Cassette has to be removed to reach switch and fuse. Insert cassette and

try adding water to toilet bowl.

Toilet can be ﬂushed manually. Add water. Add water to bowl from a separate container. Turn

ﬂush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade. Turn clockwise to close valve blade.

Cassette cannot

be removed

Check for obstacles under retaining clip. Depress retaining clip several times to check

operation. Remove cassette. Flush knob and valve blade in partial open position. Close valve

blade by moving knob clockwise.

CAUTION: If valve blade is open during cassette removal, severe damage to system can

occur. Never force insertion or removal of the cassette tank.

Valve blade

mechanism

sticks or is hard

to open

Spray light ﬁlm of silicone on blade.

Major unit

malfunction

Contact your original Motorhome Dealer.

Cassette Toilet Faults

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

142

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.12 Windows

Seitz Window Systems

To open, depress the button on the handle

and turn the handle, the majority rotate anti-

clockwise with one handle on the right stay that

will rotate clockwise.

Once all catches are open swivel the window

pane open to the desired position.

These positions are set by a ratchet on the stay,

it has 3 pre-set positions. To close, open the

window all the way past the last position and it

will then close.

All opening windows have two catch positions.

The ﬁrst position is for ventilation the second

seals the window from ventilation and rain.

Window Friction Stays

Friction stays allow for positioning of window at

any point through its opening angle.

Catcher enables three positions of the window.

Open position is where the handle is open

placed on the outer part of the catcher. If the

handle is placed in the middle of the catcher,

this is position for ventilating. Closed position is

position where the handle is closed on the inner

part of the catcher.

Window Condensation

Some windows are not vacuum sealed. Instead

the double panes of acrylic plastic are ﬁtted with

a breathable plug on the inner pane.

It is possible, in weather where extremes in

temperatures occur between night and day, that

customer will notice condensation between the

panes.

The same phenomenon may also occur when

washing your vehicle on a hot day.

The condensation should clear itself when

the ambient conditions return to normal and

the air between the panes dries. However, if

this is taking a longer time than required, the

breathable plug (normally located in the top

corner of the window) can be removed, with

a pin or sharp object, and replaced when the

panes are dry. Care should be taken when doing

this.

Acrylic (Plastic) Window Cleaning

The material used to produce most motorhome

windows is acrylic plastic. While the acrylic used

is very durable, it is able to be scratched with

relative ease and therefore,

care must be taken when cleaning your vehicle

not to use aggressive cleaning products.

Equally, care should be taken when using a

drying cloth that it is clean and free from grit.

Plastoform Window System

Within these instructions you will be able to

ﬁnd information to most common questions

about correct usage of PLASTOFORM Blanca

windows.

While Driving

When vehicle is in motion all windows must be

fully closed.

Sun blinds

Never use blind on direct sunlight. If you use the

blind on direct sunlight, also for a shorter period,

heat will accumulate between window and

blind and window may get damaged (will start

bending, ballooning).

143

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

Cleaning

Never use abrasive and corrosive substances

or solvents on windows, such as turpentine,

spirit, dishwasher detergents, as they will

damage acrylic and/or print. We recommend

cleaning with generous amount of water or

mild cleaner intended for use on acrylic. Even

cleaning with dry cloth can damage the acrylic

and leave scratches; always use moist sponge

or moist soft cloth. Never clean windows

with high pressure washer. Also carwash can

damage windows and cause scratches or other

damages.

iNote: Acrylic material can get scratched

very easily, please consider above instructions

for cleaning, so that you will not cause

scratches or other damages while cleaning.

Condensation

Condensation can appear on the window or

between both panes. This is a normal

occurrence that appears because of diﬀerent

temperatures inside and outside and properties

of acrylic itself. Condensation will disperse

after some time. This doesn’t mean that there

is something wrong with the window or that

it is leaking. With properly ventilating the

vehicle, you can in most cases prevent also

condensation.

Opening and closing the windows

Your windows are equipped with either handles

with button or handles without button and stays.

Consider the following instruction to avoid the

most common damages that can occur:

Handles with button: Always push the button

when opening/closing handle.

Stays with knob screw: Always make sure to

unscrew the knob before closing the window.

1.1 Open position

1.2 Ventilation

1.3 closed position

Plastoform Blanca windows are top quality

windows from acrylic material. If you consider

above instructions, your windows can stay

in good shape for a long time. Windows also

require periodic maintenance and check by your

dealer at least once per year.

9.13 Horrex Window Blinds

To operate, pull down or up by holding the ﬁnger

bar.

• The blind will come up from the bottom of

the cassette to close and the ﬂynet will come

down from the top

• Only operate by holding the ﬁngergrip(s) -

pulling on one side will cause uneven running

and snagging.

• It is not recommended that blinds and/or

ﬂyscreens are left in the down position for long

periods, or when travelling, as this can result

in fatigue of the spring.

• Clean the cassette, side track and fabrics with

mild detergent and water.

• Lubrication of mechanism or spring is not

required or recommended.

For more detailed information, see

manufacturer’s instructions.

144

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.14 Blind Advice

In case of prolonged exposure to the sun roller

blinds should not be completely closed as this

could cause excessive heat concentration at

the top of the window, due to characteristics

of the glazing material the windows could be

adversely aﬀected.

Blinds that shade from the bottom upwards it is

necessary to leave a gap of a few centimetres

open at the top, this way the heat between

window and blind can escape. A ﬂy screen does

not cause an obstruction.

Blinds that shade from the top downwards must

be kept completely open, or be opened regularly

to allow the heat to escape.

Keeping the windows in ventilation position

allows heat to escape.

Never fully close a roller blind system when

storing the vehicle or when not in use for longer

periods!

For vehicles containing blinds from the top

downwards or with other types of reﬂective

blinds / curtains, please make sure that these

blinds are also ventilated or not fully closed.

Ensure that all windows and roof vents are

closed when the vehicle travels on the road.

To adjust the tension of the Horrex blind:

In each corner piece there is an cord tensioner

(see photo). By unscrewing the hexagon screw,

the cord can move through the cord tensioner.

When you pull the cord, the tension will get

higher, when you let it move back the tension

will get less.

Care instructions:

• Clean the blind only with a damp sponge.

Clean on a regular basis to avoid dirt particle

build up as this can damage the blind material.

• Use only water or with mild suds or a vacuum

cleaner.

• In order to avoid material fatigue, do not leave

the ﬂynet closed for a long time.

9.15 Skyview operating instructions

Safety and care instructions

iNote: Before opening the dome please

check if all handles are disengaged and no

objects are in the opening area of the rooﬂight.

For Manual Skyviews

To open, turn the handle anti-clockwise to the

required opening position.

To close, turn the handle clockwise until

the dome lies on the seal and a resistance is

noticeable.

iNote: Before you start your journey, close

the rooﬂight by turning the handles to the

closed position and engage catches.

Opening/closing the

blind and ﬂy net

Pull the end rod from

the recessed part and

push it in a position

you desire. You can

adjust the incidence of

light with the second

operating bar.

Safety precautions

Repairs should be

carried out only by

trained personnel.

145

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

Inform an approved dealer in case of defects

and malfunctions.

9.16 Escape, Ascari and Voyager cab

roof window

The roof window on the Escape, Ascari and

Voyager is retained in position with window

catches.

The retaining catches are as previously

described on side window catches and can also

be positioned to night vent.

To open the window fully, open all four window

catches and push the window up to the required

opening height. Tighten the knob screw on the

arm of both stays. Close the window if the wind

becomes strong or when travelling.

All roof windows and Skyviews

Before starting oﬀ, check the roof light for

damage in the dome (tension cracks) and the

opening mechanism which could arise owing to,

for example, branches and other natural causes.

Do not put weight on the screen.

Do not leave the vehicle with the roof light open

(danger of burglary and water penetration).

Do not open in strong wind, rain or snowfall.

Before opening, remove snow, ice, dirt etc. from

the dome.Malfunctions must be repaired by

an approved dealer at once. Do not use caustic

detergents (danger of tension cracks in the

dome).

Before setting oﬀ close the glazed panel dome

and check the locking mechanism.

Avoid high speed (maximum speed

recommended is 130 km/h). Do not close the

blind more than 2/3 during the day (danger of

heat build up). Before starting oﬀ, open the

blind.

Care instructions

Clean the dome with the Seitz acrylic cleaner.

Opaque spots and light scratches on the dome

can be removed with the Seitz Acrylic Polish and

the Seitz Special Polishing cloth.

Use talcum powder regulary (4 times yearly) to

care for the rubber seals.

Clean the blinds only with water and mild soap

suds or a vacuum cleaner.

iNote: The guarantee becomes null and

void if the care and safety instructions are not

followed.

9.17 Roof lights

When opening the roof lights, care must be

taken to release the locking mechanism as the

unit is raised.

Roof lights must be fully closed when driving.

Roof lights provide essential ﬁxed levels of

ventilation.

Dometic Mini Heki

146

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

Opening and closing the Mini Heki

Press the release button (1) and open the roof

hood with the bracket at the same time (2).

Opening the roof light completely

Slide the bracket (2) into the I position.

Opening the roof light to the half-way position

Slide the bracket (2) into the II position.

You can push down the sliders (3) on the left and

right to lock it.

Opening the roof light to the ventilation

position

Slide the bracket (2) into the Ill position.

Closing the roof light

Slide the bracket (2) into the IV position.

Guide the bracket (2)with slight pressure to

the left and right via the catches (4), so that the

roof hood is locked and the bracket (2) is on the

release button (1)

Mini and Micro Heki rooﬂight

(when ﬁtted)

To open depress the button (Fig. A).

Pull the bar down and forwards (Fig. B).

By pushing the bar in to the marked rest

positions (Fig. C).

Two extra opening angles apart from the one in

which the dome is fully opened can be chosen.

The intermediate position can be ﬁxed with a

slide marked with the arrows. Care should be

taken to ensure the dome is closed and locked

for transit with the bar located behind the

locking button (Fig. D).

The blind ﬂynet operate together and engage via

the clips in the bar, then slide to gain the desired

blackout or ventilation (Fig. E).

147

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

Midi Heki

Opening the Dome

Intermediate position for the dome

By pushing the bar into the marked rest position,

two extra opening angles, apart from the one in

which the dome is fully opened, can be chosen.

Closing the Dome (drive and rest position)

Push the bar with both hands on the right and

the left side in such a way that the hook bolt

1. The dome on the left and the right side and

the bar lies on the push button

2. Check if the dome is locked.

WARNING: The retaining catches are

designed to hold the skylight open to the

selected position. In gusty or windy conditions

the Skylight should be closed to prevent it

from being blown fully open or slamming shut.

148

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

With crank

To open, rotate the crank until a resistance is

noticeable during the operation.

To close, reverse the operation and then check if

locked into position

Electric version

To open, push button until desired position is

reached or the electric motor switches oﬀ.

To close, reverse the operation and then check if

locked into position.Care instructions:

Care instructions:

Please clean the acrylic panes with the Seitz

Acrylic Cleaner.

Stains and light scratches on the acrylic pane

can be removed by using the Seitz Acrylic Polish

and the Seitz special polishing cloth.

Use talcum powder (4 times yearly) to care for

the rubber seals

Clean the blinds only with water and mild soap

suds

The guarantee becomes null and void if these

instructions are not followed.Omnistep single

step (where ﬁtted)

MPK Rooﬂight

(when ﬁtted)

VisionStar M pro ll

Operation

To open the rooﬂight, both pleated blinds must

be open.

Grip the crossbar in the middle and turn it

towards the opening side. Now the rooﬂight

can be opened by pushing the crossbar. As

soon as you release the crossbar the opening

mechanism snaps into this position.

To close the rooﬂight, turn it again and push it

back in the opposite direction. When the end

position is reached, the rooﬂight is locked

automatically.

WARNING:

• Keep the pleated blinds open while driving

to avoid driving noise and damage from the

airstream.

• To avoid heat accumulation do not close

blind completely during the day. Open both

pleats when not using the vehicle.

149

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

Cleaning

For easier cleaning , the dome can be removed

from the inner frame by releasing the four

plastic split pins.

WARNING:Do not loosen any screws that

are used to fasten the dome or the opening

mechanism.

Use only clear water and a soft sponge.

WARNING:Solvents may attack the plastic

and make it brittle.

After cleaning, maintain the sliding surfaces

with a thin layer of Vaseline or WD40.

This makes the extension mechanism glide

more easily. The rubber seals can be maintained

with talcum powder.

Pay attention that the pins positively click into

the locked position when re-installing the dome.

The lever arm pins should be re-installed with

the ﬂat side towards the dome.

Clean the pleated blinds with a soft brush, dry

cloth or feather duster.

WARNING: We strongly advise against wet

cleaning, as this can damage the insect screen

and blackout pleated blind.

Warranty

The legal warranty applies.

https://www.mpk-kierspe.de/Downloads

Care instructions:

The rooﬂight should only be washed by hand,

using a sponge with plenty of clean water

to avoid scratching. Caustic detergents and

solvents may attack the plastic and make it

brittle or disintegrate.

Heki care instructions

Clean the blind only with a damp sponge. Clean

on a regular basis to avoid dust/ dirt particle

build up as this can damage the blind material.

Use only water or with mild suds or a vacuum

cleaner.

In order to avoid material fatigue, do not leave

the ﬂynet closed for a long time.

Roof light blind and ﬂyscreen

The blind and ﬂyscreen operate independently

of each other and are engaged by connecting to

each other and sliding.

Safety precautions:

1. Repairs should be carried out only by trained

personnel.

2. Inform an approved dealer in case of defects

and malfunctions.

3. Before starting oﬀ, check the rooﬂight for

damage in the acrylic dome (tension cracks)

and the winding mechanism which could

arise owing to, for example, branches and

other natural causes.

4. Do not step on the acrylic dome.

5. Close the roof light before starting oﬀ (check

whether it is locked).

6. Do not leave the vehicle with the rooﬂight

open (danger of burglary or from rain).

7. Do not open in strong wind or rain.

8. Before opening, remove snow, ice, dirt, etc.

from the acrylic dome.

9. Malfunctions are to be repaired by an

approved dealer at once.

10. Do not use caustic detergents (danger of

tension cracks in the acrylic dome).

11. Do not operate whilst the vehicle is moving.

Midi-Heki rooﬂight

150

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.18 Omni-vent

(when ﬁtted)

To open the roof cover turn the knob in the

Omni-vent surround clockwise. Turn anti-

clockwise to lower the cover.

CAUTION: The lid must always be closed

when travelling.

Fan operation

The fan is turned on by touching the on/oﬀ soft

touch button S2. The middle LED light lights up

and the ventilator starts in comfort mode, this is

the lowest speed (extract). See ﬁg 18.

By pushing on the switch S1 (extract) or S3

(intake), the airﬂow can be adjusted in 6 steps.

See table below.

*MIN = 3,7 m3/min (2 W - 0,17 A)

*MAX = 24 m3/min (86 W - 7,20 A)

In order to save the battery, the speed drops

from position 6 to the lowest position after one

hour of use.

• It is possible to allow the ventilator to work

for 5 minutes on the highest speed (boost).

To do this push for 3 seconds on the button S1

(extraction) or S2 (intake). After 5 minutes the

ventilator returns to its previous speed setting.

See table below.

For reasons of security, the ventilator, the

ventilator stops when the tension is too high

(19,5 V) or too low (11,1 V) or when the fan is

blocked. For trouble shooting see ﬁg 21.

Maintenance

The ventilator grid can be removed for cleaning.

Also the mosquito screen can be taken out for

cleaning.

151

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.19 Omni step single step (where

ﬁtted)

When an Omni step is present, depending on

speciﬁcation, your motorhome is ﬁtted with

either a manual or electrically operated step.

Manual operation

When a manual step is ﬁtted, it is operated by

manually pulling out or pushing in the step to the

desired position.

Electric Operation

The OMNISTEP is operated by the lever switch.

Important: when extending the step, hold the

switch until the step is completely extended.

Never mount the step if retracted of if not fully

extended, because then the blocking is not

working and the motor can be damaged.

Check if the step is retracted before departure.

Maintenance

Dirt and frost can prevent the step from

operating properly. In this case the moving parts

should be cleaned or defrosted.

All points of movement are layered in

maintenance-free bearings.

In case of electrical failure

If the step does not retract by motor: Loosen the

square connection according to ﬁg. 5 (actions

1, 2 and 3), push the footboard in (4) and tie it to

the frame.

Current drawn

5 A. When fully extended or retracted: 14-18 A

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

9.20 Thule T4200 / 8000 Omnistor

Awning

• For the mounting height of the bottom

mounting brackets ask your dealer.

• An awning is a sun and not an all-weather

protection. The awning should be closed in

case of storm, snow or heavy rain fall (avoid

formation of a water pocket)

152

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

153

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.21 Reverse Camera System

Depending on the speciﬁcation of your

motorhome, a reverse camera system may be

installed. This uses a single or twin lens camera

system mounted at high level on the rear of the

motorhome.

The camera, or cameras, will be connected to

either

1. An LCD screen which forms part of the

windscreen mounted rear view mirror (Fiat

based motorhomes).

2. A dashboard mounted screen (Ford based

motorhomes)

The reverse camera system is powered when

the vehicle engine is running.

Single lens camera system

The single lens camera is mounted at high

level on the rear of the motorhome. While the

engine is running, the image from the camera

can be displayed using the controls on either

the rear view mirror with LCD screen (Fiat),

or dashboard mounted screen (Ford). If

Reverse gear is selected, the relevant screen

will automatically display the image from the

camera.

Twin lens camera system

Two cameras are mounted at high level on

the rear of the motorhome. While the engine

is running, the image from either camera can

be displayed using the controls on either the

rear view mirror with LCD screen (Fiat), or

dashboard mounted screen (Ford). If Reverse

gear is selected, the relevant screen will

automatically display the image from the close

range camera.

Use of cameras

The rear view camera image may be distracting

or disorientating to some drivers and as such

extra care and awareness must be observed

at all times when using the camera. When

reversing a responsible adult should assist

in guiding the driver into conﬁned spaces

particularly where obstacles or pedestrians may

be present or when visibility or lighting levels

are reduced.

The mandatory required rear view door mirrors

must be maintained and used as the primary

rear visibility aid.

The image quality available from the cameras

can be aﬀected by dirt, road spray, rain droplets,

snow and ice and as such the camera lens will

require regular inspection and cleaning. Image

quality will be reduced at night-time or by bright

lights shone in low level lighting conditions.

154

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

Reverse Sensor System

If a reverse sensor system is ﬁtted to your

motorhome, this will use a row of sensors

ﬁtted at low level on the motorhome, to detect

obstacles. The system will automatically switch

on when Reverse gear is selected.

A buzzer located close to the driver’s seat

(within a bed base) will then sound when an

obstacle has been detected and is close to the

rear of the motorhome. An intermittent tone

indicates an obstacle at the maximum distance

of the sensors range, and the time interval

between tones will reduce as the distance to the

obstacle reduces, until a constant tone is heard.

Please consider that the distance is measured

from the rear bumper of the motorhome – if

an accessory such as a cycle rack is added, the

driver must take into account the additional

clearance required beyond the bumper, when

reversing toward an obstacle.

If a tow bar is installed, this should include a

facility to disable the reverse sensor system

when a trailer is connected. A tow bar

installation featuring this facility can be installed

by your Swift Group dealer.

There is a volume control on the buzzer with

three settings ON, LOW and OFF.

9.22 Cycle racks

The Swift Group allows the ﬁtment of a two

cycle rack carrier and we have made provision

for this pre positioned mounting rails ﬁtted to

the rear of your motorhome.

These are spaced at various heights as shown

on the table on the previous page.

The Swift Group only recommends a Thule cycle

rack which will conveniently clip in to the pre

installed mounting rail. The maxiumum weight

which can be mounted on the carrier is 50kg.

Please be aware a cycle rack can not be ﬁtted

onto a model where there is a rear escape

window. Contact your dealer for clariﬁcation if

your van has a rear window.

Other lifting variants are also available. Please

review with your dealer and Thule for the

available options.

Thule Bike carrier type Thule Excellent

standard version

Thule Elite G2

standard version

Thule Sport G2

standard version

6 Thule reference 309821 306560 307126

Capacity (# bikes) 2+1+1 2+1+1 2+1

Max load (kg) 50 50 50

Max bike weight (kg) 30 30 19

Range Models

Edge

All

✓ ✓ ✓

Ascari

All

✓ ✓ ✓

Escape &

Voyager

All (except 674)

✓ ✓ ✓

Kon-Tiki

All (except 774, 874, 984

and 994)

✓ ✓ ✓

155

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.23 Seat swivel (Driver/Passenger)

To turn the swivel, slide the BLACK lever

rearwards and adjust to the required angle.

Before driving oﬀ ensure the locking mechanism

is fully secure.

9.24 Heated seats

Your motorhome may be ﬁtted with heated

driver and passenger seats in the Fiat cab area.

For further details of the operation of these

seats, please see the Fiat base vehicle manual.

9.25 Side lockers

Some models are provided with exterior access

locker doors. These are suitable for storing

external equipment.

9.26 Aguti Smart Lounge (Escape,

Voyager and Kon-Tiki)

The front of the Escape, Voyager and Kon-Tiki

models, includes the Aguti Smart Lounge with

fold-up travelling seats.

The lounge in daytime position

Remove all the cushions. Fold away and lower

the table to the bottom position. Slide the table

top to rear to allow access in to the seat.

Turn the handle on the side of the seat and

lift the seat backrest to the upright travelling

position. Repeat on the other side of the van.

Open the front ﬂap by disengaging the turn

button catch and retain open by ensuring

the magnetic catch is located on to the metal

support frame.

Place the inﬁll make-up cushion on the seat

base hard up to the seat back. Place the seat

base cushion onto the seat base ensuring that it

overlaps the inﬁll make-up cushion and that the

Velcro strips engage.

Separate the two halves of the backrest cushion

by peeling apart the Velcro strips and place the

thicker section against the seat backrest. Route

the seatbelt over the top of the backrest cushion

and pull out the seatbelt buckle from the base

of the seat.

Safely store away all the remaining cushions

ready for travel.

156

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

To return to the lounge set up the process is

reversed.

When folding away the travelling seat ensure

the seat is returned to its horizontal position.

Do not rotate past the horizontal.

9.27 Bunk and luton bed safety

Where the sleeping surface is over one metre

above ﬂoor level the following notices apply.

WARNING: Always ensure safety boards

are located before entering the bunk.

WARNING: Use upper bunks for sleeping

only, with the provided protection against fall

out in position.

WARNING: Care shall be taken against the

risk of fall out when the upper bunks are being

used by children, especially under 6 years of

age, these bunks are not suitable for use by

infants without supervision.

Layouts with an over-cab bed (luton bed),

access may be restricted when the lower bed

(model speciﬁc) is fully extended at night time.

9.28 Powered Bed Mechanism (model

speciﬁc)

If ﬁtted to your motorhome, the bed control

panel will be positioned next to the main control

panel located above the habitation entrance

door.

Control Panel Operation

Activate the panel by inserting the supplied key

and turning to the ‘ON’ position. To raise or lower

the bed, press the corresponding arrow; UP

(arrow up), DOWN (arrow down).

iNote: The bed can only be operated when

the engine ignition is turned oﬀ.

The bed will continue to move while the switch

is being pressed. It will stop either when the

button is released, or the pre-set stop position

is reached or the end of the stroke position is

reached.

Before lowering, unfasten the safety belts

and ensure the bunk net catches have been

released.

After raising, fasten the safety belts to secure

the bed for transit. Ensure the bed is at the

highest position before fastening the belts. The

safety belts must always be fastened when the

vehicle is in transit.

When the bed is not in use turn the key to the

‘OFF’ position and remove the key to deactivate

the control panel.

WARNING: The bed operating mechanism

should only be operated by a responsible

adult. Take care to ensure that all persons,

pets and loose items are clear of the top and

underside of the bed before operating the

lifting mechanism. Do not operate the lifting

mechanism with a person or heavy object on

the bed. Always remove the key when the bed

lifting mechanism is not in use.

WARNING: Do not touch the lifting system

while the bed is being operated. Safety straps

must always be fastened when performing

maintenance on the lifting system.

157

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

Manual Operation

In the event of power failure or an emergency

the bed can be operated manually. To access

the motor a Pozidriv screw driver is required to

remove the screws on the access panel located

behind the locker door under the bed. A 5mm

Allen key is also required to operate the motor.

Insert the Allen key into the motor as indicated

in the diagram and turn to lift or lower the bed

as required.

WARNING: Always ensure the power is

disconnected before performing any operation

on the bed lifting system.

Care points

Care must be taken to remove obstructions

which will restrict the full range of movement of

the motorised drop-down bed, in particular the

safety belts and bunk net catches. If an object is

left in the way when the bed is being lowered the

motor will continue to run unwinding the belts. If

this occurs, immediately stop the operation and

remove the obstruction. Once the obstruction is

removed raise the bed to re-tension the belts.

Once the belts have been re-tensioned the bed

can be lowered again.

WARNING: (ASCARI):

Do not use the hob unless the bed is lifted to

the highest stowage position.

9.29 Lippert Rise and Fall Island Bed

(Kon-Tiki)

WARNING: Before using the bed always

ensure the safety locking pin is inserted into

the use position (ﬁg.a).

On some layouts we have the facility to increase

the garage storage area under the rear Island

Bed. The bed can be raised or lowered in order

to store and remove objects from the storage

compartment.

To adjust the height of the bed insert the crank

handle into the winding mechanism located

underneath the bed in the garage area. It can

be accessed through the oﬀside garage door.

Ensure there is nothing obstructing the path of

the bed and no excess weight on top of the bed

before moving.

To allow the bed to move, the safety locking pin

must be extracted ﬁrst (ﬁg. b). Then turn the

crank handle clockwise to raise the bed height

or anti-clockwise to lower the bed height. When

the required height is reached insert the safety

locking pin (ﬁg. a) and remove the crank handle.

WARNING: Before using the bed always

ensure the safety locking pin is inserted into

the use position (ﬁg.a).

158

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.30 Tables

iNote: The free standing table legs have

a positive locking mechanism. Care must be

taken to ensure that, when folded, the leg

which is closed ﬁrst locks into the second

position.

When engaging legs in down position the

mechanism must be positively locked down.

WARNING: When erecting the free

standing table, be careful to avoid trapping

ﬁngers.

Mapa Electric Telescopic Table leg

iNote: Some layouts have a folding table

that incorporates an extension leaf to support

the table once extended. Slide the extension

out before unfolding the table top in order to

support it.

The electric retractable table is controlled by

a switch on the kitchen pattress. The table top

unfolds and has the ability to slide and rotate in

to the required position

Ensuring there are no objects blocking its path

and with the table top folded away in its storage

position, press the table power switch (located

on the kitchen pattress) to the up position and

hold until the desired height is reached.

Pull out the metal support arm from under the

table and unfold the table leaf.

WARNING:Ensure the leaf support is

pulled out, before unfolding the table.

To rotate and slide the table top, lift the lever

underneath the table and move to the desired

position.

The storage of the table is the reverse of the

above.

WARNING:When travelling the table must

be stowed in the lowest position. The table will

not function with the engine running.

WARNING:Should the table be forced to

move when it is obstructed by something, the

fuse may blow and the table will be unable to

move. The fuse is located next to the switch in

the Kitchen pattress.

Table storage

Tables stored in the table storage compartment

must be securely clipped into place whilst in

transit.

To avoid damage care must be taken when

removing tables from their stored position.

159

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

WARNING: All non-ﬁxed tables must

be stowed in the storage position when the

vehicle is moving.

9.31 Care of laminate tops, tables,

furniture and doors

Do not use abrasives, chemically treated cloths

or aggressive detergents as these may cause

damage

Do not place hot objects on laminated surfaces

i.e. tops, tables. Any temperatures 70°C and over

will cause permanent damage.

Clean worktop surfaces, furniture and door

fascias with a soft, slightly damp cloth, dry oﬀ

with a soft cloth.

9.32 TV inlet

Depending on speciﬁcation, the motorhome

may be ﬁtted with an external co-ax connection

and/or a roof mounted TV aerial. When ﬁtted,

the external co-ax connection point will be

within the mains inlet enclosure.

Co-ax connection point within the mains Inlet

enclosure

A short co-ax lead featuring a screw on co-ax

connection will be present behind the Blue

mains inlet connector. A co-ax cable will be

ﬁtted and connected within the motorhome,

from the back of this connection, to the primary

TV position within the motorhome.

At the same time, further co-ax cable or cables

will be ﬁtted which route from the TV aerial

position (i.e. within the wardrobe) to each of the

TV positions within the motorhomes.

The primary TV position will feature a socket

marked 12v, TV, and SAT. The co-ax from the

external connection point will route to the socket

output marked SAT, whilst the co-ax from the TV

aerial will route to the socket output marked TV.

At any secondary TV positions (if present) co-ax

from the TV aerial will be ﬁtted, and routed to

the socket output marked TV.

An external TV aerial or site TV feed can be

connected to the external connection point;

signals from that connection will then be

available at the primary TV position within

the motorhome. As the connections are of the

screw-on type, it is also possible to use this

co-ax to route from an external satellite dish,

for instance a tripod mounted dish, to a satellite

receiver.

9.33 Status 570 Digital antenna

system

Travelling

Do not travel:

• with the antenna raised

• with the antenna set for vertical signals

To reduce the possibility of damage when

travelling, point the antenna backwards.

The RED SPOT on the bottom of the mast

indicates the front of the Antenna.

Your motorhome may be ﬁtted with a Status

570 TV aerial. Please read the user instructions

for the TV aerial, which are available from the

following location:

https://bit.ly/3bFoq0L

If you are unable to view the documents on line,

please contact the supplier, your dealer or Swift

for an electronic or paper copy.

After performing any of the ‘Actions’ above you

must re-tune your TV.

160

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.34 TV Brackets

In some models a bulkhead mounted bracket is

supplied to mount the TV on. Whilst the bracket

has a travel lock it is good practise to unclip

the TV from the bracket and store securley for

transit.

9.35 Motorhome Wiﬁ (where ﬁtted)

In some models, a 3G/4G/5G antenna is pre-

ﬁtted, which is connected to a MiFi (My Wiﬁ)

device. This system connects to the cellular

network, and provides a Wiﬁ connection inside

your motorhome for up to 10 devices to connect

to.

Please check with your dealer whether the MiFi

device is fully installed in your motorhome, and

whether the SIM card supplied with the device

has been pre-installed. The position within the

motorhome is layout speciﬁc, but typically in

a wardrobe or in a cupboard above a fridge/

freezer.

Once the SIM card is installed and components

are connected, basic operation is as follows:

• Turn on the power to the device, using the

switch on the base of the unit, at the left hand

side. A red LED will illuminate, and a charging

/ battery symbol will appear in the display on

the front of the unit.

• Press the power button on the front of the

unit. The display will change while the device

starts, and once the unit is ready, a network

name and passkey will appear on that display.

• Search for Wiﬁ on your mobile phone / tablet

/ laptop, looking for the network name as

displayed on the device. Connect, and when

prompted for the passkey/password, use the

code as displayed on the screen.

Complete user instructions, including how to ﬁt

the SIM card and mount and connect the MIFI

device if still required, can be located at the

address below. Please read these instructions

before using the system.

http://www.motorhomewiﬁ.com/swift/

If you are unable to view the documents on line,

please contact the supplier, your dealer or Swift

for an electronic or paper copy.

9.36 Cab Radios

Fiat based motorhomes

For full details of the features within the Fiat

entertainment system, please see the paper

copy literature supplied with your vehicle.

The Fiat radio antenna is housed within the

passenger wing mirror. Any issues with your

radio reception should be referred back to your

Fiat dealer.

While speciﬁcations are subject to change,

power to the Fiat entertainment system is

typically turned OFF 20 minutes after the vehicle

ignition is switched oﬀ.

It is possible to ﬁt an aftermarket radio to the

base vehicle, customers should note this may

aﬀect steering wheel controls and increase

power consumption

Ford based motorhomes

For full details of the Zenec Xzent F-285

entertaiment system, please see paper copy

literature supplied with your vehicle.

Power to the Xzent unit will be switched OFF,

when the vehicle ignition is switched OFF.

An additional switch is located forward of the

Xzent unit on the dashboard to supply power to

the radio which defaults to the leisure battery

as its primary source of power with the ignition

switched oﬀ.

161

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

9.37 Shower

When using the shower, always ensure that the

shower door is fully closed thus avoiding water

spray on unprotected areas.

Trigger head shower

• Squeeze trigger to release water. Release

trigger to stop. Twist trigger up to gain

permanent water ﬂow, lower to stop.

• Orbit shower heads are also provided with a

button at the side of the head to allow users to

control the ﬂow.

• Care should be taken as water may become

hot temporarily when switched on until it

mixes and regulates.

• Small children should be surpervised at all

times when using the shower.

• We recommend unfastening the trigger

shower head before travelling and storing

safely to prevent it becoming detached whilst

travelling.

9.38 Motorhomes with external BBQ

point

Models equipped with an external barbeque

point can be used to power any gas appliance

suitable for the gas used in the motorhome,

at the working pressure shown on the label

in the barbeque outlet box. Please note when

using the outlet that the ﬁtted regulator will

allow a maximum of 1.5kg per hour of gas to

be taken from the gas bottle. Therefore the

consumption of gas from both the appliances

within the motorhome and the appliance

connected to the barbeque point cannot exceed

a total of 1.5kg per hour at any one time. If you

are in any doubt please consult your dealer for

advice. To use point proceed as follows.

When external gas equipment is being

connected, the operating pressure of the gas

supply of 30 or 50 mbar must correspond with

the operating pressure of the equipment that is

being connected (see data plate).

The plug-in connection can only be made if the

quick-acting valve is closed. The safety locking

mechanism can be released by sliding back the

coupling sleeve.

The coupling K-valve is designed such that the

quick-acting valve can only be opened if the

connection is being made via the plug-in

connection. The connection is made by inserting

the plug-in connection into the safety coupling.

This operation can be carried out using one

hand. After uncoupling the equipment, seal oﬀ

the valve opening using the protection cap.

iNote: The external gas socket is only

suitable for removing gas, not for feeding gas

into the gas system.

162

FITTED EQUIPEMNT

WARNING: Care should be taken when

using the external barbeque point. Never

barbeque next to an awning or tent.

WARNING: The barbeque point should

only be used as an outlet point for gas, never

connect a gas bottle direct to the outlet.

9.39 The External Shower Point

The external shower point if ﬁtted, will be

supplied with a separate shower head and hose

assembly.

To connect the shower, simply align the plug

with the socket and push into position.

To remove, pull the lower trigger and pull the

plug from the socket.

9.40 Colour reference

The colour codes for touch ups or resprays for

Fiat cabs are Fiat White 249, Lanzarote Grey

385, Metallic Iron Grey 691, Metallic Black 632

and Expedition Grey 676. For the Ford cab the

colour is Magnetic Grey FM6EWHA. The white

Swift coach built habitational body components

are Fiat White 249.

Please be aware that colours can fade over

time, and therefore, if the vehicle is more than

a few years old, it is suggested a colour match

be obtained. If these are small areas that do not

require a full respray of the entire panel you can

use an over the counter polishing compound

to return the original ﬁnish. We would always

recommend that an inconspicuous area of the

motorhome is tested beforehand.

163

10. Maintenance

10.1 Vehicle modiﬁcations & non-standard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

10.2 Motorhome exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

10.3 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

10.4 Changing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

10.5 Motorhome Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

10.6 Swift Shield Fabric (model speciﬁc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

10.7 LED Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

10.8 Winterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

10.9 Chassis and rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

10.10 AL-KO exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

10.11 Caring for the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

MAINTENANCE

164

MAINTENANCE

10.1 Vehicle modiﬁcations & non-

standard parts

As the owner of a Swift Group Product, you are

able to make any modiﬁcations you wish, either

by yourself or through a dealer, without aﬀecting

the Swift 3/6 Year Warranty.

However, please be aware that any issues,

resulting directly or indirectly, from a

modiﬁcation or ﬁtment of a non-standard

part, will not be covered by The Swift Group

Warranty.

WD40 is not recommended for external or

internal use

WD40 attacks paintwork and sealants.

If a lubricant is required for Interior hinges,

Sliding door tracks, Exterior door hinges,

Plastic tracking etc. We recommend “Ambersil

40+” this is readily available from most DIY/

Automotive spare part retailers

Before carrying out any DIY work within the

warranty period (3/6) years please check with

your Swift Group dealer.

10.2 Motorhome exterior

Cleaning

1. Wash the motorhome regularly with mild

detergent. Rinse with cold water and leather

oﬀ.

2. For better protection a similar coloured good

quality car wax may be applied.

For sealed areas a mild soap is the best way to

clean without aﬀecting the sealant.

Acid or alkaline based cleaners or solvents

should not be used.

WARNING: Under no circumstances use

any abrasive cleaning agents or solvents on

the exterior. Do not wash your motorhome

with a high pressure washer as these can

permanently damage the seals of your

motorhome.Care should be taken as the

silicon in some polishes can attack the rubber

used on the exterior for seals and gaskets.

Acrylic Windows

Wash windows carefully, as you would with the

paintwork of your car, do not scrub windows

prior to removing surface dirt and ﬁlm with a

hose pipe - trapped dirt could cause scratching.

Wash with a solution of warm soapy water,

windows can then be dried oﬀ with a leather

shammy.

Small scratches can be removed, consult your

dealer.

Catches and stays do not require any special

attention or lubrication.

Acrylic (Plastic) Window Cleaning

The material used to produce most caravan and

motorhome windows is acrylic plastic. While

the acrylic used is very durable, it is able to be

scratched with relative ease and therefore, care

must be taken when clearing your vehicle not to

use aggressive clearing products. Equally, care

should be taken when using a drying cloth that it

is clean and free from grit.

10.3 Condensation

What is condensation

Condensation is the process of change of water

from its gaseous form (water vapour) into

liquid water when it comes into contact with a

surface that is cold. Condensation generally

occurs when warm air cools quickly and loses

its capacity to hold water vapour, and as a result

water vapour condenses to form droplets.

Why condensation occurs

Condensation occurs when warm moist air

meets a cold surface. The level of condensation

will depend upon humidity levels, how moist the

air is and how cold the surfaces are they come

into contact with.

165

MAINTENANCE

If the temperature falls below the dew point

temperature, it is quite normal for condensation

to occur on any material within the motorhome

that is cold, for example the external walls,

plastic windows etc.

When condensation occurs

Condensation occurs usually in winter months,

because ambient temperatures are colder

(leading to cold surfaces) and windows and roof

vents are opened less so the moist air cannot

escape.

Where condensation occurs

Condensation will occur where warm moist air

is put into the atmosphere in areas such as in

bathrooms (during showering) and in kitchen

areas (during cooking).

In the enclosed space of a motorhome, the

moist air from the kitchen or bathroom areas

will inevitably transfer to the rest of the vehicle,

which in turn condenses on cold surfaces

leading to visible water droplets. This issue

is compounded by warm moist air being

generated from normal breathing.

Condensation will also form in cold areas where

air movement and ventilation is restricted (e.g.

cupuboards, wardrobes, under beds, etc.)

What is important

It is important to provide ventilation and air

ﬂow, so that warm moist air can escape, or

be externally cooled, and to use the heating

reasonably by not making the motorhome too

warm such that people perspire, as this will only

serve to generate more moist air and therefore

more condensation.

However, in particularly cold periods, where

the external ambient temperatures are low,

condensation may still form on external walls as

the insulation levels may well not be thermally

able to cope with the diﬀerence between the

internal and external temperatures.

How can you prevent condensation

Provide ventilation so that moist air can

escape.

a. Good ventilation of the vehicle when cooking

or when drying clothes, footwear or pets

is essential. Observe when windows begin

to show signs of misting and increase

ventilation by opening slightly by 1cm or

opening a roof vent, as these will help, but

keep the habitation door closed as much as

possible to retain heat.

b. If drying damp clothes or towels, open a

window to ventilate the area and allow the

moist air to escape.

c. Try to make sure that the motorhome is

partially heated. It can take a long time for a

cold motorhome to warm up, so it is better to

have a small amount of heat for a long period

than a lot of heat for a short time.

d. After showering, keep the bathroom window

or skylights open, and shut the bathroom

door long enough to dry oﬀ the room.

e. In all other areas provide some ventilation.

Fixed ventilation is provided in accordance

with BS EN 721: 1998 this is through

skylights and ‘Heki roof lights’ in the roofs

and from ventilators through the ﬂoor

under cookers, doors and in bed boxes. It is

important not to block these.

f. Electrical heating is dryer than gas heating,

and introduces less moisture into the

atmosphere. Do not use additional portable

paraﬃn or ﬂue-less gas heaters at all.

g. If left unoccupied and unheated for long

periods of time the temperatures can soak

down thermally into the entire product and

become very cold. Whenever possible, put

the heating on at a low level before use by

pre heating in cold weather.

h. Even with reasonable ventilation it is likely

if the temperature is less than 5°C and the

humidity is high that condensation will occur.

Ideally the temperature should be kept about

20°C when occupied.

Too much ventilation in cold weather is

uncomfortable and wastes heat. All that is

needed is a very slightly opened window or

skylights. Opening a skylight or ‘Heki; rooﬂights

partially or windows opened to about 1cm will

usually be suﬃcient.

166

Provide reasonable heating

a. Do not use portable paraﬃn or ﬂueless gas

heaters at all.

b. If drying damp clothes or towels, open a

window enough to ventilate the area and

turn on the electric element of the space

heater but do not hang items over the heater.

c. Try to make sure that all areas are at least

partially heated. Condensation most often

occurs in unheated areas.

d. To prevent condensation, the heat has to

keep room surfaces reasonably warm. It

can take a long time for a cold motorhome

to warm up, so it is better to have a small

amount of heat for a long period than a lot of

heat for a short time.

Motorhomes use only carefully selected

insulation materials but unlike most rooms at

home all walls are exterior walls, so they lose

heat through all walls as well as the roof and

ﬂoor.

Even in a well insulated motorhome with

reasonable ventilation, it is likely that during

cold weather (less than 10°C) condensation will

occur. Ideally the temperature should be kept

about 20°C although this is not always possible.

Mould Growth

Any sign of mould growth is an indication of

the presence of moisture and if caused by

condensation gives warning that heating or

ventilation may require improving.

New vehicles

New products take a long time before they are

fully ‘dried out’ because of the moisture in the

materials used during manufacture. While this

is happening extra heat and ventilation will be

required.

Corrosion

Your motorhome has been designed and built

using the corrosion resistant materials (e.g.

GRP (Glass Reinforced Plastic) panels, stainless

steel ﬁxings, hot dip galvanised chassis and

powder coated extrusions), which if looked

after will extend the life and aesthetics of the

product in normal service. In certain conditions,

for example, if sited for extended periods in

close proximity to sea and sand spray, you may

experience premature ageing and/or corrosion

of the vehicle than under normal conditions.

To help prevent this, we advise regular cleaning

and application of a good quality external car

polish. For extended periods (where the vehicle

is not in use), we recommend the use of well

ﬁtted breathable vehicle cover as protection

from harsh coastal elements.

10.4 Changing Exterior Bulbs

Always replace like for like.

The road lights and awning light ﬁtted to the

coachbuilt part of your motorhome are LED and

contain no user serviceable parts, in the event

of a failure or damage the entire light would

need to be replaced. For the road lighting on the

Fiat/Ford base vehicle, please see the Fiat/Ford

handbook supplied as Fiat/Ford speciﬁcations

are subject to change.

10.5 Motorhome Interior Care

Follow these guidelines to ensure your

investment is receiving the very best attention.

Side Walls, Roof Lining

A simple wipe over with a damp cloth and a very

mild detergent is all that is needed.

Soft Furnishings

Should be vacuumed occasionally to remove grit

and sand and help to keep its smart appearance

over the lifetime of the upholstery. The

upholstery can be cleaned with a mild, reputable

upholstery cleaner. It is recommended that the

curtains and pelmets are specialist cleaned only.

The foam used

in cushions is manufactured to meet ﬁre

regulations. It requires time to return to its

normal position after prolonged use.

Cupboard Catches

It is advisable to lubricate all cupboard catches,

sliding bolts and hinges from time to time.

We recommend “Ambersil 40+” this is readily

available from most DIY/ Automotive spare part

retailers.

MAINTENANCE

167

MAINTENANCE

Doors

In order to provide customers with the latest

designs of door furniture it is possible, due

to the use of natural wood, that warping may

occur. This should not detract from the correct

functioning of items ﬁtted in the motorhome.

Information

During the normal travelling vehicle vibration

and ﬂexing may cause some of the furniture

doors to become out of alignment.

For your convenience many hinges are

adjustable.

Leather care

Leather furniture, in a normal contract

and domestic environment, requires little

maintenance, although obviously leather in

lighter shades will need more attention.

Regular care of leather does ensure its lasting

quality and some general rules for regular

cleaning and maintenance are:

• Clean the leather with a soft damp cloth taking

care not to soak the leather.

• For a more thorough clean, use the Bridge

of Weir Leather Cleaning and Protection kit

available directly from the distribution centre.

• Do not use saddle soap, wax polishes or spray

polishes.

• Do not use any product or any method

of cleaning not recommended by the

manufacturer.

• Avoid letting any buckles, studs and zips come

into direct contact with the furniture.

• Avoid drying out the leather by taking extra

care where there is heating or an open

ﬁreplace.

iNote: The above cleaning instructions

DO NOT apply to Nubuck Suede or any other

uncoated leather.

10.6 Swift Shield Fabric (model

speciﬁc)

The Swift Shield fabric ﬁtted to some Swift

Group products is a luxury stain resistant

durable fabric using Aquaclean® technology.

This is a revolutionary fabric treatment that

allows you to clean stains using water only. This

provides you with simple fabric maintenance in

the minimum amount of time.

Cleaning Instructions

Aquaclean® helps to remove the majority of

household stains (wine, ink, sauce, fat, mud,

chocolate, cream, etc.) in three simple steps:

Remove any excess residue

on the upholstery.

Apply water over the stain,

either directly or using a

damp cloth. Wait a few

seconds.

Press down over the stain

with a damp cloth and

rub gently over the fabric

in circular movements. If

the stain does not come

oﬀ completely, repeat the

process as required.

For further details and stain cleaning demo

videos visit the Cleaning Gallery on the

Aquaclean® web site: http://www.aquaclean.

com/ES_en/home.

Aquaclean fabrics cannot accept any

responsibility for misuse of the fabric by

allowing bleach or dissolvent substances

coming into contact with it.

168

MAINTENANCE

Stainless Steel Bowl Care Instructions

After use always remove any plastic bowl or

mat, rinse down the surface and dry with a soft

cloth to prevent spotting. For more stubborn

dirt or grease a non-abrasive multi-purpose

cream cleaner, such as CIF, may be used. To

preserve the appearance of your appliance we

recommend plastic bowls or mats are not stored

in the sink during transit.

The quality of water can aﬀect your bowl's

appearance. If the water has high iron content, a

brown surface stain can form on the bowl giving

the appearance of rust. Additionally, in areas

with a high concentration of minerals, or with

over-softened water, a white ﬁlm may develop

on the sink. To combat these problems, towel

dry the sink after use, and clean at least once

every week .

Surface scratching will be most noticeable on

highly polished components. These marks are

usually only superﬁcial and can be removed with

a proprietary stainless steel cleaner/polish.

If the surface has a directional polished grain

always clean along the grain and NOT across.

Never use wire wool pads to clean the surface.

Cleaning agents containing bleach should

NOT be left in contact with stainless steel. This

includes many of the new “trigger-dispense”

products and some multi purpose cream

cleaners. Also leaving rubber mats or dishpans

in the sink can lead to surface rust or pitting,

always remove them after use.

Work Surfaces

You should not stand very hot items on any

of the work surfaces, especially models with

polycarbonate moulded sinks and drainers.

Kitchen Equipment

All the thermoplastic parts in these areas have

easy clean surfaces. To ensure long life and to

prevent damage you must not use any cleaning

materials at all and ensure water temperatures

do not exceed 70ºC (putting cold water in ﬁrst is

suggested). After every use it is essential that

you rinse with clean water only and wipe with a

soft damp cloth. Failure to follow these simple

instructions may result in premature failure

or cracking which will not be covered by any

guarantees (including extended warranties).

Bathroom/Shower

These products should be cleaned immediately

after use. Apply a warm, mild soapy water

solution with a soft cloth and rinse with clean

water immediately. Abrasive materials must

never be used.

Washroom bi-fold doors

• Panels should be cleaned with warm soapy

water and a non-abrasive cloth/sponge.

• An abrasive or aggressive cleaning agent is

never to be used

• A proprietary plastic cleaner Vuplex®, can also

be used. This can be obtained from outlets

such as Amazon, ebay etc.

Furniture

A simple wipe over with a damp cloth should be

all that is required. Polishing with a proprietary

brand of wax polish enhances and maintains

furniture in showroom condition.

Kitchen Drainer and Cutting Board

You should not stand hot items on to the

removable plastic kitchen drainer. To wash use

only warm soapy water, do not use chemicals

and bleach.

Changing interior bulbs / LED Lights

For non LED lights remove the lens or

lampshade to access the bulb.

Always replace like for like

10.7 LED Replacement

In many applications LED lights are ﬁtted which

contain no user serviceable parts. In the unlikely

event of failure of one of theselamps, the entire

lamp will need to be replaced – several types

of LED light are intended for semi-permanent

installations using self adhesive mounts etc,

and dealer assistance may be required should

damage or other need for replacement occur.

169

MAINTENANCE

10.8 Winterisation

The Swift Group recommends the following

winterisation points for customers:

Servicing

Arrange (in advance) the yearly service and

habitation check, if the motorhome's next

service is due while the vehicle is stored.

Plumbing

Water expands as it is frozen, and so trapped

water, when it expands, can damage the tap /

valve /pump or pipe it is trapped within. For this

reason, (in addition to reasons of hygiene), the

water system should be fully drained when not

in use, particularly in colder weather.

• Open both the fresh tank and waste water

tank drain valves (via the control panel above

the entrance door, the switches in the China

Locker or by the manual valve under the skirt

(Edge and Voyager) or remove the bung in the

bottom of the fresh tank (Edge).

• Open the drain valve (yellow handle) next to

water heater, and leave open. See section 7.2.

• Fully open all the taps and shower mixer, move

mixer position to the middle, and leave all taps

in the open position.

• Unscrew the shower head and shower hose,

shake out remaining water and allow water to

drain. It is advised to leave the shower head

and hose disconnected.

• Run pump for a short time, until all water is

expelled.

• After a short while the majority of water will

have left the plumbing system. At this point

however it is still important to ensure that

the pump itself is ‘dry’. During this part of the

winterisation, a suitable absorbent cloth or

container should be used to catch a small

amount of spilled water that will result.

Disconnect the pipe work from the pump by

pulling the blue quick release tabs, at either side

of the pump, at right angles to the pipe work,

then pulling the pipe and connectors from the

pump. See Fig.1 Run the pump for a short while

to expel any remaining water within the pump.

Pull pipe out

Pull quick

release tabs

Fig.1

170

MAINTENANCE

Electrical

If vehicle is being stored while connected to

230v Mains Hook-up:

• Ensure that the leisure battery is connected,

and the leisure battery fuse or fuses are in

place.

• The isolator switch on PSU should be in the

'ON' position, however. the control panel

should be switched 'OFF'.

• If Alde system is installed, there is a frost

protection setting, which can be used. See

Alde user instruction manual.

• Vehicles can be left in this condition for

extended periods, with the charger operating

to maintain the battery. However, periodic

maintenance and inspection is recommended,

this should include the battery condition.

If vehicle is being stored not connected to 230v

Mains Hook-up:

• Charge the leisure battery for 24 hours prior to

placing motorhome in storage.

• Ensure the isolation button on PSU is in the

'OFF' position.

• The battery should not be adversely aﬀected

by winter temperatures but the level of charge

should be maintained to maximise the life span

of the battery. This can be achieved using an

automotive type battery charger as and when

required.

• Disconnect the vehicle battery negative

terminal. Check the charge of the battery

every three months. (See Vehicle Inactivity

section in the Fiat handbook). Alternatively put

the ignition into the 'Isolation Mode'

WARNING: If your motorhome is ﬁtted

with Swift Command Tracker (by Sargent)

which monitors battery voltage. If you plan to

disconnect or remove your leisure battery for

maintenance or external charging, then please

contact the monitoring station before you

remove or disconnect the battery. If a leisure

battery is not ﬁtted, please also contact the

Tracker monitoring station before removing

the mains hook up. The Swift Command

Tracker monitoring station can be contacted

on 0345 6027302 Gas system.

Gas system

• Ensure the gas supply is isolated at the gas

bottle, and ensure that the gas manifold taps

are oﬀ.

• Check the age and condition of the high

pressure gas hose and regulator, and replace

if required.

Appliances

Check the battery expiry date on the smoke

alarm and CO detector and replace or remove as

required.

• Ensure the fridge is turned oﬀ.

• Clean the inside of the fridge.

• Prop the fridge door open, and if possible,

the internal freezer compartment door for

ventilation.

• Fit fridge vent winter covers (if available).

• Ensure all hob / oven / microwave surfaces

are clean.

• If the motorhome is going to be left connected

to 230v supply while not in use, ensure the

microwave is unplugged.

• Clean the toilet and empty the cassette and

lubricate the seals with an acid free lubricant

such as Thetford High Grade Seal Lubricant.

See Thetford toilet Users manual.

Exterior (Body / Chassis)

• Ensure that all windows, skylights and access

doors are closed and secured.

• Ensure all ﬁxed ventilation points (high and

low) are clear from debris and obstructions.

• Ensure the vehicle is not parked where falling

debris (i.e. leaves, tree sap) could cause

damage.

• Avoid leaving the vehicle parked in soft

ground, long grass or a potential area where

standing water may form.

• Lubricate relevant points on the chassis.

171

MAINTENANCE

Wheels and Tyres

• Do not store in one position with partially

deﬂated tyres. The tyre walls will suﬀer

and do present a real danger of blow outs,

especially when travelling at faster speeds

than are allowed in the UK. The wheels

should be turned every couple of weeks.

If you are removing the wheels, follow the

jacking procedure for changing a wheel.

Check your tyres regularly for signs of age and

deterioration, particularly wear, cracking and

blistering. If in doubt consult a reputable tyre

ﬁtter.

• A purpose made cover maybe used, but please

ensure the cover is a good ﬁt, breathable and

securely ﬁtted.

iNote: A poorly ﬁtted cover can rub and

damage the bodywork. Non-breathable

covers will encourage mould to grow.

Interior (Furniture / furnishings)

• Open all lockers and internal doors, to ensure

good circulation.

• Remove cushions and store them in a dry

location or ensure all cushions are placed in a

well ventilated area.

• Close all blinds and curtains. Customers are

reminded to check the tension on blinds after

storage if left closed for long periods.

• Thoroughly ventilate the motorhome by

opening doors or windows periodically.

• Placing water absorbent crystals in the van

during the winter months, will help reduce

moisture levels and mould growth.

• We do not recommend leaving portable

heaters in the van unattended.

Recomissioning the water system

Re-connect the water pump by positioning

the pipe connectors into the pump housing

and pushing the blue tabs into position. it is

advisable, after a period of non-use, to ﬂush

the water system with a sterilising solution

suitable for stainless steel containers and

components. Fill the fresh water tank with water

and sterilising ﬂuid (refer to sterilising ﬂuid

instructions for the amount to use). Turn the

pump on and open all the taps, ensuring that the

water drains away safely to the waste tank.

When the waste tank is full empty the ﬂuid into

a designated waste water area. Re-ﬁll the tank

with fresh water and ﬂush through the system

as described above; repeat this until all traces

of the sterilising ﬂuid have been ﬂushed out.

(See sections 7.3, 7.4 and 7.6)

Prepare the toilet system by adding water and

Thetford ﬂuid to the toilet waste tank.

(See section 9.11)

Appliances

Before starting motor caravanning after

storage, check all gas appliances and electrical

points.

iNote: Preferably not less than once a year,

the electrical installation should be inspected

and tested by a qualiﬁed electrician.

After storage it is advisable to air the Motorhome

and clean throughout, especially cooking

appliances and the refrigerator.

Replace the bedding if they were removed for

storage.

WARNING: Always follow the

manufacturers recommended procedures

after use of ﬁtted equipment in the

Motorhome, before storing for any length of

time.

10.9 Chassis and rear axle

Some models are built on a Fiat base vehicle,

the chassis of which has been converted by

AL-KO. This conversion provides a hot dipped

galvanised steel chassis coupled with a wide

track rear axle utilising steel torsion bar

suspension, imparting vastly improved stability

and road holding.

10.10 AL-KO exhaust system

A standard Fiat exhaust system is ﬁtted, utilising

an AL-KO modiﬁed tail pipe, available through

your approved dealer. A standard Fiat/Ford

exhaust system is ﬁtted to all other models, with

the addition of a Swift Group tail pipe.

10.11 Caring for the environment

After many years of service you may decide that

your motorhome has become beyond economic

repair and should be disposed of. Please ensure

that you comply with the end of life vehicle

legislation and take it to an authorised treatment

facility where it will be properly dealt with to

minimise any negative environmental impact.

The transaction will be logged at the DVLA,

identifying that you are no longer the owner of

the vehicle.

172

MAINTENANCE

173

11. Useful Information

11.1 Owners club . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

11.2 Spares and after sales customer service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

11.3 Repair facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

11.4 Caravan Clubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

11.5 Motoring Associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

11.6 Trade Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

11.7 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

11.8 Change of ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

USEFUL INFORMATION

174

USEFUL INFORMATION

11.1 Owners club

The Owners Club is a completely independent

organisation run for the beneﬁt of the

motorhome owners. They have numerous rallies

during the year in various parts of the country.

Apart from the friendliness and companionship

the Club generates it is also actively engaged

in charity work for those less fortunate than

ourselves. The address of the Secretary of the

Owners Club can be obtained from the Swift

Group website.

11.2 Spares and after sales customer

service

A catalogue of spare parts are available through

our Swift Group Dealer Network, from door

catches through to spare wheels. Please note,

all parts enquiries must be directed through

your dealer, as the Swift Group does not operate

a direct retail service.

We endeavour to supply parts for vehicles up

to 8 years old. If the original part is no longer

available your dealer should be able to source a

suitable alternative.

iNote: Please remember to quote chassis

VIN (Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number) when

ordering any items from your dealer. This can

be found at the bottom of the windscreen, on

the Swift and Ford plates on the passenger cab

door B pillar or on the Fiat plate on front cross

member within the engine compartment.

11.3 Repair facilities

Should you be unfortunate to encounter damage

to your vehicle, we have a number of approved

workshops and dealerships with workshop

facilities to undertake such repairs.

Details of which can be found via our website:

www.swiftgroup.co.uk/ﬁnd-a-dealer

175

USEFUL INFORMATION

The enjoyment of motorhoming can be greatly

enhanced by membership of one or more of the

various motorhome/caravanning, motoring and

holiday clubs. Here are some useful addresses:

11.4 Caravan Clubs

The Caravan Club,

East Grinstead House, East Grinstead

West Sussex, RH19 IUA

Tel: 01342 326944

www.caravanclub.co.uk

The Camping and Caravanning Club,

Greenﬁelds House,

Westwood Way,

Coventry,

West Midlands.

Tel: 0845 130 7631 or 024 7647 5448

www.campingandcaravanningclub.co.uk

11.5 Motoring Associations

Automobile Association (AA)

Fanum House,

Basingstoke,

Hants. RG1 2EA

Tel: 08705 448866

www.theaa.co.uk

e-mail: customer.serv[email protected]

RAC Motoring Services

8 Surrey St

Norwich Norfolk NR1 3NG

Tel: 01922 437000

www.rac.co.uk

The Society of Motor Manufacturers and

Traders Limited (SMMT)

Forbes House,

Halkin Street,

London SW1X 7DS

Tel: 020 7235 7000

www.smmt.co.uk

Green Flag

Tel: 0845 246 1557

www.greenﬂag.com

RBS Insurance

Churchill Court

Westmoreland Road

Bromley

Kent BR1 1DP

Tel: 0800 158 2493

11.6 Trade Association

NCC

Catherine House,

Victoria Road,

Aldershot,

Hampshire, GU11 1SS

Tel: 01252 318251

www.thencc.org.uk

www.motorhomeinfo.co.uk

e-mail: [email protected]

176

INDEX

Index

Symbols

12 Volt DC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 104

230V mains electrical equipment power

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

3030 Alde Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Accessory harnessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

AC Current Limiter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Acrylic (Plastic) Window Cleaning . . . . . . 142

Additional security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Advice on towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Aguti Smart Lounge (Escape, Voyager and Kon-

Tiki) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Air-conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Alarm Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Alde 3030 Control Panel and Appliance

Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Alde Compact 3030 Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Alde Zonal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

AL-KO exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

All roof windows and Skyviews . . . . . . . . . 145

Annual service/ inspection record . . . . . . . . . 10

Ascari Hob and Oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Awnings and Tents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 46

Awning Spaces LPG Appliance Exhaust . . . . 62

Base Vehicle Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Bathroom/Shower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 102

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Before moving oﬀ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Blind Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Body Shell Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 7, 9

Boiler / Water System Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Bottle Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Bunk and luton bed safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Butane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Butterﬂy outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Cab Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Camp sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Caravan Clubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Care of laminate tops, tables, furniture and

doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Care of the microwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Caring for the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Cassette Toilet Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Change of ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 180

Changing a gas cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Changing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Changing interior bulbs / LED Lights . . . . 168

Charging from Solar Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chassis and rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Cleaning water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

CO alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Coastal code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Code of conduct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Combi 4 Gas/Electric and Combi 6 Gas/ Electric

appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Common Fault Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 105

Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Connecting to the Mains 230V supply and Safety

checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 88

Conventional Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Cooker 3 burner with combined grill and oven /

cooker 3 burner + electric hotplate with separate

grill and oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Cooking Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

CP Plus Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Cupboard Catches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Cycle racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Cylinder compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Dedicated travelling passenger seating . . . 23

Dogs and other Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Dometic absorption refrigerator . . . . . . . . 131

177

INDEX

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Driving licence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

EC400 + Control Panel Component Layout . 72

EC400+ Motorhome Power Control System 70

EC800 Air-conditioning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

EC800 Bluetooth Pairing & Other Controls . 97

EC800 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

EC800 Heating Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

EC800 Power screen (230V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

EC800 Refrigerator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

EC800 Water Tank Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Electrical Operation of Alde 3030 Heating

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Electrical Operation of Truma Combination

Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Electric Step Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 98

En-route heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Escape, Ascari and Voyager cab roof window

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Escape paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Essential Habitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

European Touring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Event of a Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Extended Body Shell Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 7

External 12v Fill Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Factory ﬁtted Solar Energy System . . . . . . 115

Facts about LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Fiat Based Motorhome Tyre Speciﬁcations 23

Fiat Fix & Go Repair Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Fiat handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Fire Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Ford handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Fresh water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Fresh Water Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Frost Protection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Furniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Gas Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Gas fault ﬁnding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Gas Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Gas Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Gas safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Generator usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Generator Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 101

Habitation relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Handbooks (chassis & converter) . . . . . . . . . 18

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Height-based seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Horrex Window Blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

How can you prevent condensation . . . . . 165

Inﬂation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Interior (Furniture / furnishings) . . . . . . . . 171

ISOFix Child Seat Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Kitchen Drainer and Cutting Board . . . . . . 168

Kitchen Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Kon-Tiki Thetford K1520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Large storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Leather care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

LED Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Leisure Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 102

Levelling the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Lighting & Dimming Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Lippert Rise and Fall Island Bed (Kon-Tiki)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Loading of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Maintenance & servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Mapa Electric Telescopic Table leg . . . . . . 158

178

INDEX

Mass in Running Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Maximum Technically Permissible Laden Mass

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Maximum User Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Microwave owner general user instructions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Midi Heki . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Mini and Micro Heki rooﬂight . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Motorhome battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Motorhome exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Motorhome Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Motorhome National Speed Limits . . . . . . . . 32

Motorhomes with external barbeque point 59

Motorhomes with external BBQ point . . . 161

Motorhome terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Motorhome theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Motorhome Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Motorhome Water Tank Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Motorhome Wiﬁ (where ﬁtted) . . . . . . . . . 160

Motoring Associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Mould Growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

MPK Rooﬂight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

My Swift Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

National Speed Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Nose weight of Towed Trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Omni step single step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Omni-vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Oven Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Owners club . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Parking sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Personal Eﬀects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Plastoform Window System . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Plumbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Positioning the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Powered Bed Mechanism (model speciﬁc)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Power Supply Unit - Component Layout . . 71,

Pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Pressure switch adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Priming the Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Propane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Provide reasonable heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Recomissioning the water system . . . . . . . 171

Remote Access & Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Removal of Fiat spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Removal of spare wheel on ALKO conversion

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Repair facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Residual Current Device & Miniature Circuit

Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Reverse Camera System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Roof lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Roof loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Sanitising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Satellite Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Seat belts and legislation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Seat swivel (Driver/Passenger) . . . . . . . . . 155

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Seitz Window Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Selecting a pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Sensor cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Separate Water Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Shower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Side lockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Side Walls, Roof Lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Single lens camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Skyview operating instructions . . . . . . . . . 144

Smart Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Smoke Alarm Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Soft Furnishings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Solar Charge Management . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 93

Solar panel connection point or Solar panel

179

ﬁtment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Spares and after sales customer service 174

Stainless Steel Bowl Care Instructions . . 168

Status 570 Digital antenna system . . . . . . . 159

Sterilising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 52

SuperSure Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 7, 8

Supplier contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Swift Command App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Swift Command Power Control System . . . . 87

Swift Command SIM Coverage & Usage

information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Swift Command Tracker by Sargent . . . . . . . 42

Swift Command Web usage & Description

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Swift Shield Fabric (model speciﬁc) . . . . . 167

System Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . 101

System Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 99

Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Table storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Tank heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Technical Data & Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Temperature Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

The Country Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

The electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Thermal insulation heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Thetford Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Thetford Triplex Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Three point seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Thule T4200 / 8000 Omnistor Awning . . . . 151

Tow Bar Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Trade Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Truma Combination Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Truma Combination Boiler Control Panel and

Appliance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Truma Heating System and Air Flow . . . . . 125

TV Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

TV inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Twin lens camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Types of gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Tyre Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Tyre Sealant and lnﬂator Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Use of cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Use of Site Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Using the Grill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Using the Hotplate Gas Burners . . . . . . . . . 132

Using the Oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Vehicle modiﬁcations & non-standard parts

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Vehicle Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

VIN CHIP identiﬁcation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

VIN CHIP™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

VIN (Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number) . . . . . . . 41

Washroom bi-fold doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Waste Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Waste water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Water fault ﬁnding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Water level sensor & cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Water System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 91

Water Tank Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Weight-based seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

What to do if you require assistance . . . . . . . . 9

Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Wild camping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Window Friction Stays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Winterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Work Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

INDEX

180

All Swift Group models have been certiﬁed by

the NCC for compliance with stringent European

Standards, British Legislation and industry SET

Codes of Practice speciﬁcally relating to health

and safety issues.

The approval process covers the testing and

inspection of critical areas of the product from

ﬁre safety, weights and dimensions, to gas,

electrics and ventilation. Every motorhome

carries the “NCC Approved Motorhome” badge.

The NCC also conduct unannounced inspections

at the Swift factory to ensure continued

compliance. NCC Approval gives you peace of

mind that your motorhome is legal and safe.

All Swift Group motorhomes are UK and

European Whole Vehicle Type Approved.

This is your assurance that these motorhomes

meet all European regulations, and have been

constructed and conform to approved safety,

environmental and manufacturing control

standards.

11.8 Change of ownership

Notiﬁcation of change of ownership

As the new second hand owner, please notify

the Swift Group of the change of ownership by

emailing your details to

enquiries@swiftleisure.co.uk, please also

provide a telephone number, date of purchase

and a copy of your V5 document. We will conﬁrm

that you records have been updated via an email

and you will be invited to join the “My Swift Life”

portal, which will enable you to access your

vehicle details.

If you do not have access to email, you can

complete the form below and send the

completed form with a copy of your V5 to the

following address:

Customer Services

Swift Group Limited,

Dunswell Road,

Cottingham,

East Yorkshire,

HU16 4JX.

iNote: Warranties are only transferable

providing the terms and conditions of the

warranty have been met by the previous

owner(s). Please see warranty information at

the beginning of this handbook for full details.

The ‘Extended Body shell warranty’ is a non-

transferable warranty.

USEFUL INFORMATION

181

Details of

motorhome:

Model:

Chassis No:

New owner:

Name:

Address:

Email:

Telephone:

Mobile:

Date of purchase:

Name:

owner:

Name:

Address:

Email:

Telephone:

Mobile:

Date of purchase:

USEFUL INFORMATION

182

NOTES

SWIFT GROUP

Dunswell Road

Cottingham

East Yorkshire

HU16 4JX

Tel: 01482 875740

Fax: 01482 840082

Customer Experience Team

enquiries@swiftleisure.co.uk

FIND OUT MORE AT SWIFTGROUP.CO.UK